WO2023010579A1 - Feedback method and apparatus for harq-ack codebook, and communication device - Google Patents

Feedback method and apparatus for harq-ack codebook, and communication device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023010579A1
WO2023010579A1 PCT/CN2021/111350 CN2021111350W WO2023010579A1 WO 2023010579 A1 WO2023010579 A1 WO 2023010579A1 CN 2021111350 W CN2021111350 W CN 2021111350W WO 2023010579 A1 WO2023010579 A1 WO 2023010579A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
feedback
time unit
sliv
physical channel
harq
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/111350
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吴作敏
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority to CN202180098287.4A priority Critical patent/CN117356064A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2021/111350 priority patent/WO2023010579A1/en
Publication of WO2023010579A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023010579A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the embodiment of the present application relates to the technical field of mobile communication, and specifically relates to a hybrid automatic repeat-request acknowledgment (Hybrid Automatic Repeat-reQuest Acknowledgment, HARQ-ACK) codebook feedback method and device, and communication equipment.
  • Hybrid Automatic Repeat-reQuest Acknowledgment Hybrid Automatic Repeat-reQuest Acknowledgment, HARQ-ACK
  • the network device can schedule the transmission of the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) for the terminal device by carrying the downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI) of the downlink authorization.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the downlink authorization DCI includes indication information of physical uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel, PUCCH) resources, and after receiving the PDSCH, the terminal device will decode the PDSCH (acknowledgment, ACK) or negative acknowledgment (Negative Acknowledgment, NACK) information) is fed back to the network device through the PUCCH resource.
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for feeding back a HARQ-ACK codebook, and a communication device.
  • the first device determines the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit in the first time unit group, the first time unit The time unit in the unit group corresponds to the first feedback time unit;
  • the first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the second device receives the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit;
  • the second device determines, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, that a physical channel on a time unit in the first time unit group receives corresponding HARQ-ACK information;
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback apparatus provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the first device, including:
  • the first determination unit is configured to determine a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group, the The time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first feedback time unit;
  • a sending unit configured to send the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the second device, including:
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit;
  • the second determining unit is configured to determine, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the corresponding HARQ-ACK information received by the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group;
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the communication device provided in the embodiment of the present application may be the first device in the above solution or the second device in the above solution, and the communication device includes a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the above-mentioned feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • the chip provided by the embodiment of the present application is used to realize the above-mentioned feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • the chip includes: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the chip executes the above-mentioned feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • the computer-readable storage medium provided by the embodiment of the present application is used for storing a computer program, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the above-mentioned HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method.
  • the computer program product provided by the embodiment of the present application includes computer program instructions, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the above-mentioned method for feedbacking the HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • the computer program provided by the embodiment of the present application when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the above HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method.
  • the decoding result can be fed back correctly, and the problem of inconsistent understanding of the HARQ-ACK codebook by the network device and the terminal device can be avoided.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is an optional schematic diagram of scheduling a PDSCH according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is an optional schematic diagram of scheduling a PDSCH according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is an optional flowchart of a feedback method of a HARQ-ACK codebook according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 is an optional flowchart of a feedback method of a HARQ-ACK codebook according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of an optional HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is an optional schematic diagram of a candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is an optional schematic diagram of a candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is an optional schematic diagram of a candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an optional structure of an apparatus for feedbacking a HARQ-ACK codebook according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • a communication system 100 may include a terminal device 110 and a network device 120 .
  • the network device 120 may communicate with the terminal device 110 through an air interface. Multi-service transmission is supported between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 .
  • the network device 120 may be an access network device that communicates with the terminal device 110 .
  • the access network device can provide communication coverage for a specific geographical area, and can communicate with terminal devices 110 (such as UEs) located in the coverage area.
  • the network device 120 may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, or a Next Generation Radio Access Network (NG RAN) device, Either a base station (gNB) in the NR system, or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN), or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable Devices, hubs, switches, bridges, routers, or network devices in the future evolution of the Public Land Mobile Network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN), etc.
  • Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB in a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system
  • NG RAN Next Generation Radio Access Network
  • gNB base station
  • CRAN Cloud Radio Access Network
  • the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wear
  • the terminal device 110 may be any terminal device, including but not limited to a terminal device connected to the network device 120 or other terminal devices by wire or wirelessly.
  • the terminal equipment 110 may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (User Equipment, UE), a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • Access terminals can be cellular phones, cordless phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, IoT devices, satellite handheld terminals, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) stations, Personal Digital Assistant , PDA), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in 5G networks or terminal devices in future evolution networks, etc.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • the terminal device 110 can be used for device-to-device (Device to Device, D2D) communication.
  • D2D Device to Device
  • the wireless communication system 100 may also include a core network device 130 that communicates with the base station.
  • the core network device 130 may be a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC) device, for example, Access and Mobility Management Function (Access and Mobility Management Function , AMF), and for example, authentication server function (Authentication Server Function, AUSF), and for example, user plane function (User Plane Function, UPF), and for example, session management function (Session Management Function, SMF).
  • the core network device 130 may also be a packet core evolution (Evolved Packet Core, EPC) device of the LTE network, for example, a data gateway (Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway, SMF+PGW- C) equipment.
  • EPC packet core evolution
  • SMF+PGW-C can realize the functions of SMF and PGW-C at the same time.
  • the above-mentioned core network equipment may be called by other names, or a new network entity may be formed by dividing functions of the core network, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • Various functional units in the communication system 100 may also establish a connection through a next generation network (next generation, NG) interface to implement communication.
  • NG next generation network
  • the terminal device establishes an air interface connection with the access network device through the NR interface to transmit user plane data and control plane signaling; the terminal device can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (N1 for short); access Network equipment such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with UPF through NG interface 3 (abbreviated as N3); access network equipment can establish control plane signaling with AMF through NG interface 2 (abbreviated as N2) connection; UPF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 4 (abbreviated as N4); UPF can exchange user plane data with the data network through NG interface 6 (abbreviated as N6); AMF can communicate with SMF through NG interface 11 (abbreviated as N11) The SMF establishes a control plane signaling connection; the SMF may establish a control plane signaling connection with the PCF through an NG interface 7 (N7 for short).
  • gNB next generation wireless access base station
  • Figure 1 exemplarily shows a base station, a core network device, and two terminal devices.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include multiple base station devices and each base station may include other numbers of terminals within the coverage area.
  • the device is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 1 is only an illustration of a system applicable to this application, and of course, the method shown in the embodiment of this application may also be applicable to other systems.
  • system and “network” are often used interchangeably herein.
  • the term “and/or” in this article is just an association relationship describing associated objects, which means that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and there exists alone B these three situations.
  • the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or” relationship.
  • the "indication” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a direct indication, may also be an indirect indication, and may also mean that there is an association relationship.
  • A indicates B, which can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also indicate that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, and B can be obtained through C; it can also indicate that there is an association between A and B relation.
  • the "correspondence” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may mean that there is a direct correspondence or an indirect correspondence between the two, or that there is an association between the two, or that it indicates and is indicated. , configuration and configured relationship.
  • the "predefined” or “predefined rules” mentioned in the embodiments of this application can be used by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other It is implemented by indicating related information, and this application does not limit the specific implementation.
  • pre-defined may refer to defined in the protocol.
  • the "protocol” may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, and this application does not limit this .
  • the research of the NR system may include new frequency bands, such as 52.6GHz-71GHz or 71GHz-114.25GHz.
  • the new frequency band may include licensed spectrum or unlicensed spectrum.
  • the new frequency band includes dedicated spectrum and shared spectrum.
  • the unlicensed spectrum is the spectrum allocated by the country and region that can be used for radio device communication.
  • This spectrum is usually considered a shared spectrum, that is, communication devices in different communication systems can be used as long as they meet the regulatory requirements set by the country or region on the spectrum. To use this spectrum, there is no need to apply for a dedicated spectrum authorization from the government.
  • the communication device follows the "Listen Before Talk (LBT)" principle, or in other words, the communication device needs to perform a channel access process. That is, before a communication device transmits a signal on an unlicensed spectrum channel, it needs to perform channel sensing (sensing). Only when the channel monitoring is successful, the communication device can perform signal transmission; The channel monitoring fails, and the communication device cannot send signals.
  • LBT Listen Before Talk
  • Channel monitoring success also called LBT success or channel monitoring idle.
  • LBT success the energy detection performed on the channel in the listening time slot is lower than the energy detection threshold.
  • ⁇ Channel listening failure also called LBT failure or channel listening busy.
  • the energy detection performed on the channel in the listening time slot is higher than or equal to the energy detection threshold.
  • the subcarrier spacing considered in the new frequency band may be larger than the subcarrier spacing supported by the existing NR system.
  • the current candidate subcarrier spacing includes at least one of the following: 240kHz, 480kHz, 960kHz, 1.92MHz, 3.84MHz.
  • the corresponding parameter sets (Numerology) under some candidate subcarrier spacings are shown in Table 1.
  • the network device can schedule the transmission of the PDSCH for the terminal device through the downlink grant DCI.
  • the downlink grant DCI includes PUCCH resource indication information
  • the terminal equipment feeds back the decoding result (ACK or NACK information) of the PDSCH to the network equipment through the PUCCH resource.
  • the NR system supports dynamic determination of the HARQ feedback timing.
  • the network device schedules the terminal device to receive the PDSCH through the DCI, where the DCI includes indication information of the PUCCH resource used to transmit the HARQ-ACK corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the instructions can include:
  • PUCCH resource indicator used to determine PUCCH resources
  • ⁇ HARQ feedback timing indicator (PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator): used to dynamically determine the time domain position of the HARQ feedback resource, such as the time slot of the HARQ feedback resource, usually represented by K1.
  • the HARQ feedback timing indication is used to indicate the value in the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set may be preset or configured by the network device, and the HARQ feedback timing set includes at least one K1 value.
  • the HARQ feedback timing indication may not be included in the DCI, and the time domain position of the HARQ feedback resource is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set is preset, and the preset value is ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ .
  • the DCI format corresponding to the DCI is a fallback DCI format such as DCI format 1_0.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set configured by the network device includes 4 values, and the HARQ feedback timing indication information includes 2 bits.
  • the HARQ feedback timing indication information is 00, it indicates the first value in the HARQ feedback timing set; when the HARQ feedback timing indication information is 01, it indicates the second value in the HARQ feedback timing set, and so on.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set includes invalid K1 (for example, the corresponding K1 value is -1)
  • the HARQ feedback timing indication information indicates the invalid K1, it means that the time slot where the PUCCH resource is located is temporarily uncertain.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set is configured by the network device, and the DCI format corresponding to the DCI is a non-fallback DCI format such as DCI format 1_1 or DCI format 1_2.
  • the number of bits included in the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the DCI is determined according to the number of values included in the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device performs HARQ-ACK feedback, it includes semi-static codebook feedback such as Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback or Type-3 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback and dynamic codebook feedback such as Type-2 or eType-2 HARQ- ACK codebook feedback.
  • semi-static codebook feedback such as Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback or Type-3 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback
  • dynamic codebook feedback such as Type-2 or eType-2 HARQ- ACK codebook feedback.
  • the Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to a candidate PDSCH receiver within the HARQ-ACK feedback window.
  • Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback for a PDSCH without repeated transmission, if the terminal device receives the PDSCH on time slot n, the terminal device should feed back the HARQ-ACK corresponding to the PDSCH on time slot n+k Information; for the PDSCH with the number of repeated transmissions R, if the terminal device receives the PDSCH from time slot n-R+1 to time slot n, the terminal device should feed back the HARQ-ACK corresponding to the PDSCH on time slot n+k Information; if the terminal device receives the DCI for releasing the semi-persistent scheduling (Semi-Persistent Scheduling, SPS) PDSCH configuration on time slot n, the terminal device should feed back the ACK information corresponding to the DCI on time slot n+k.
  • SPS semi-persistent Scheduling
  • the time slot n+k is based on the last time slot in the multiple time slots as a reference.
  • the time slot n+k can be regarded as a feedback time slot, and k is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set. If the terminal device needs to feed back the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the PDSCH in other feedback time slots other than the time slot n+k, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the PDSCH is set as NACK information.
  • One feedback slot corresponds to a group of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities included in one HARQ-ACK feedback window.
  • the group of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set and the time domain resource assignment (Time domain resource assignment, TDRA) table.
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on the time slot includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to at least part of the PDSCH, for example, at the position corresponding to the at least part of the PDSCH in the Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on the feedback time slot Feedback the corresponding HARQ-ACK information.
  • the corresponding position in the Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on the feedback slot is set as NACK information.
  • a feedback time slot corresponds to a group of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities within a HARQ-ACK feedback window, which is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set and the TDRA table. Specifically, the K1 value is used to determine at least one downlink time slot corresponding to a candidate PDSCH receiver opportunity, and the TDRA table is used to determine the number of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot. If the terminal device does not indicate the ability to receive multiple unicast PDSCHs within one time slot, one downlink time slot corresponds to one candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity.
  • the TDRA table includes N rows, and each row corresponds to a Start and Length Indicators (SLIV) value. If at least one of the symbols corresponding to the PDSCH indicated by the SLIV corresponding to a certain row in the TDRA table is an uplink symbol when the downlink slot is associated, the row is considered to correspond to invalid scheduling, that is, the row is not used to determine the candidate PDSCH Receive opportunities.
  • SLIV Start and Length Indicators
  • the rows corresponding to the effective scheduling included in the TDRA table first determine the symbol index m1 of the end symbol corresponding to the row corresponding to the earliest end symbol position of the candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity according to the SLIV value corresponding to each row, that is, m1 is the effective scheduling row
  • m1 is the effective scheduling row
  • the TDRA table includes 3 rows of SLIV: SLIV1, SLIV2, and SLIV3. Assuming that for a PUCCH feedback slot, the 3 rows of SLIV correspond to a downlink slot (for example, the slot does not include uplink symbols), then the All 3 lines of SLIV are valid SLIV. It is assumed that SLIV1 schedules symbols 2-5, SLIV2 schedules symbols 3-6, and SLIV3 schedules symbols 7-13.
  • the earliest end symbol position in the above three lines of SLIV is SLIV1, and the corresponding symbol index m1 is symbol 5, that is, the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to the downlink time slot is 1; then judge the start symbol of SLIV2, and the number of SLIV2
  • the starting symbol is symbol 3, before symbol 5, so SLIV2 and SLIV1 correspond to the same candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities (that is, because some symbols of SLIV1 and SLIV2 overlap, the network device will only schedule one of them at a time); for the remaining SLIV (ie SLIV3), repeat the above process, the earliest end symbol position is SLIV3, the corresponding symbol index m2 is symbol 13, the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to the downlink time slot is increased by 1, that is, the candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to the downlink time slot The number is 2, that is, in this example, the downlink time slot corresponding to the PUCCH feedback time slot corresponds to 2 candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities.
  • rows in the TDRA table may be associated with candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities or associated with SPS PDSCH releases.
  • Figure 2 shows an example of Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set configured by the network device includes 4 values, namely ⁇ 2, 3, 4, 5 ⁇
  • the HARQ-ACK feedback window corresponding to the feedback time slot n includes time slot n-5, time slot n- 4.
  • Timeslot n-3 and timeslot n-2 the HARQ-ACK feedback window corresponding to feedback timeslot n+1 includes timeslot n-4, timeslot n-3, timeslot n-2 and timeslot n- 1.
  • the terminal device does not indicate the ability to receive multiple unicast PDSCHs in one time slot, one downlink time slot corresponds to one candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity.
  • K1 in the DCI received by the terminal device on time slot n-5 indicates 5 and the DCI schedules PDSCH1; K1 in the DCI received on time slot n-3 indicates 3 and the DCI Scheduling PDSCH2; K1 in the DCI received on time slot n-2 indicates 3 and the DCI schedules PDSCH3; K1 in the DCI received on time slot n-1 indicates 2 and the DCI schedules PDSCH4, then the terminal device The decoding results of PDSCH1 and PDSCH2 are fed back on time slot n, and the decoding results of PDSCH3 and PDSCH4 are fed back on time slot n+1.
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on PUCCH2 on slot n+1 is shown in Table 3:
  • One DCI schedules multiple downlink transmissions
  • each time slot occupies a shorter length of time due to the larger spacing between subcarriers. If the method of PDSCH scheduling for each time slot in the low-frequency system is continued, the terminal equipment will be required to detect the PDCCH in each time slot, thus requiring the terminal equipment to have strong processing capabilities. In order to reduce the processing capacity requirements of the terminal equipment, it may be considered to introduce a scheduling mode in which one DCI schedules multiple physical channels.
  • the network device can use one DCI to schedule at least two physical channels such as PDSCH transmission, or use one DCI to activate at least two downlink resources for at least two physical channel transmissions (wherein, the at least two downlink resources can be belong to the same SPS resource configuration, or may belong to different SPS resource configurations).
  • the at least two physical channels include a first physical channel and a second physical channel. The first physical channel and the second physical channel may be used to transmit different transport blocks (Transport Block, TB).
  • the network device can use DCI0 to schedule 4 PDSCH transmissions, the 4 PDSCHs include PDSCH0, PDSCH1, PDSCH2 and PDSCH3, and PDSCH0, PDSCH1, PDSCH2 and PDSCH3 are used to transmit different TBs respectively.
  • the number of bits corresponding to each physical channel is different from the number of bits corresponding to each physical channel when one DCI schedules one physical channel.
  • the maximum number of TB or maximum number of bits corresponding to each physical channel is 1, and when one DCI schedules one physical channel, the maximum number of TB or maximum number of bits corresponding to each physical channel for 2.
  • each physical channel is fed back by TB, and when one DCI is scheduled to schedule one physical channel, each physical channel is fed back by a Code Block Group (CBG).
  • CBG Code Block Group
  • the terminal device may be configured with time-domain bonding feedback, or the terminal device may The number of bits corresponding to each physical channel when one DCI is configured to schedule multiple physical channels is different from the number of bits corresponding to each physical channel when one DCI is configured to schedule one physical channel.
  • the terminal device is configured with a semi-static codebook, how to determine the semi-static HARQ-ACK codebook is a problem that needs to be solved.
  • An optional processing flow of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the first device, as shown in FIG. 4 , including the following steps:
  • the first device determines a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group.
  • the time units in a time unit group correspond to the first feedback time unit.
  • the first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • An optional processing flow of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the second device, as shown in FIG. 5 , including the following steps:
  • the second device receives the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
  • the second device determines, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group;
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • An optional processing flow of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to a communication system including the first device and the second device, as shown in FIG. 6 , including the following steps:
  • the first device determines a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group.
  • the time units in a time unit group correspond to the first feedback time unit.
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device by using the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit.
  • the second device determines, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group.
  • the time unit may be understood as one of time slots, symbols, sub-slots, sub-frames, milliseconds, seconds, and the like.
  • the time unit is taken as an example to describe the feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook of the present application.
  • the terminal device of the first device is configured with the first control information format, and the maximum number of physical channels that can be scheduled by the first control information format is M, that is, M is the maximum number of physical channels that can be scheduled by the first control information format.
  • the first control information format is used to schedule transmission of at least two physical channels, or to activate at least two resources, where the activated at least two resources are used to transmit at least two physical channels.
  • the first device is a terminal
  • the second device is a network device
  • the first control information format is DCI format
  • the physical channel scheduled by the first control information format is PDSCH
  • the candidate physical channel receiving opportunity is a candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity Chance.
  • the first device is a first terminal
  • the second device is a second terminal
  • the first control information format is a sidelink control information format
  • the physical channel scheduled by the first control information format is a physical sidelink shared channel (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH)
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is the candidate PSSCH receiver opportunity.
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • the first device is a terminal
  • the second device is a network device
  • the first control information format is used to activate at least two downlink resources
  • the activated at least two downlink resources are used to transmit at least two PDSCHs.
  • the first device is a first terminal
  • the second device is a second terminal
  • the first control information format is used to activate at least two sidelink resources
  • the activated at least two sidelink resources are used to transmit at least two PSSCH .
  • the at least two resources belong to the same or different SPS resource configurations.
  • M 8.
  • M is 4.
  • the value of M is determined according to the TDRA table.
  • the value of M is determined according to the row corresponding to the largest number of SLIVs in the TDRA table, or the value of M is equal to the number of SLIVs in the row corresponding to the largest number of SLIVs in the TDRA table.
  • the first device can detect the first control information format that schedules the following number of physical channels: 4, 3, 2 or 1.
  • the physical channels that can be scheduled by the first control information format supported by the first device may include: physical channel 1, physical channel 2, physical channel 3, and physical channel 4.
  • the number of SLIVs in each SLIV row in the TDRA table is less than or equal to M.
  • different SLIVs are used to indicate different candidate physical channel receiving opportunities.
  • Line 1 SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4;
  • Line 2 SLIV2-1, SLIV2-2;
  • Line 3 SLIV3-1; then M is 4 in this example.
  • the multiple physical channels scheduled by the first control information format are continuous or discontinuous in the time domain.
  • different feedback time units correspond to different HARQ-ACK codebooks.
  • the first device determines the HARQ-ACK codebook corresponding to the feedback time unit, and sends the HARQ-ACK codebook corresponding to the feedback time unit to the second device through the feedback resource on the feedback time unit.
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook corresponding to the first feedback time unit is referred to as the first HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first feedback time unit is any feedback time unit.
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook fed back at the first feedback time unit includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group corresponding to the first feedback time unit.
  • the time unit group corresponding to the first feedback time unit is the first time unit group, and the first time unit group may be understood as a HARQ-ACK feedback window or time unit corresponding to the first feedback time unit.
  • the first device is a terminal
  • the second device is a network device
  • the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit are PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources
  • the first time unit group is a downlink time unit corresponding to the first feedback time unit.
  • the first device is a first terminal
  • the second device is a second terminal
  • the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit is a physical sidelink feedback channel (Physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH) resource
  • the first time unit group is the side travel time unit corresponding to the first feedback time unit.
  • PSFCH Physical sidelink feedback channel
  • the time units in the first time unit group are continuous.
  • the first feedback time unit is time slot n
  • the time units in the first time unit group corresponding to time slot n include: time slot n-5, time slot n-4, time slot n-3, and time slot n-5. Gap n-2.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are discontinuous.
  • the first feedback time unit is time slot n
  • time units in the first time unit group corresponding to time slot n include: time slot n-5, time slot n-4, and time slot n-2.
  • the candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in the time unit can be understood as the opportunity that the second device may transmit the physical channel in the time unit, that is, the candidate physical channel transmission opportunity, or the opportunity that the first device may receive the physical channel on the physical channel, that is, Candidate physical channel receiver opportunities.
  • one time unit includes one or more candidate physical channel receiving opportunities.
  • one time unit includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, then the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
  • the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is the multiple candidate physical channel receiver opportunities HARQ-ACK information corresponding to one or more candidate physical signal receivers.
  • the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit when a time unit includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit, and when a time unit includes multiple candidate physical channel receiver opportunities, The number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit is the same.
  • the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is different from that of multiple candidate physical channel receiver opportunities included in a time unit
  • the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver among the plurality of candidate physical channel receivers is the same.
  • the first time unit group corresponding to the first feedback time unit includes time units: time slot 1, time slot 2, and time slot 3, where the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time slot 1 include receiver opportunity 1 and time slot 3.
  • Receiver opportunity 2 the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on time slot 2 includes receiver opportunity 3
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on time slot 3 includes receiver opportunity 4 and receiver opportunity 5
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes: receiver opportunity 1 Corresponding HARQ-ACK information, HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver opportunity 2, HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver opportunity 3, HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver opportunity 4, and HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver opportunity 5.
  • the first time unit group corresponding to the first feedback time unit includes time units: time slot 1, time slot 2, and time slot 3, wherein the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time slot 1 include receiver opportunity 1 and receiver opportunity 2, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on time slot 2 includes receiver opportunity 3, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on time slot 3 includes receiver opportunity 4 and receiver opportunity 5, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes: receiver opportunity
  • the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to 1 and the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver 2 are bundled, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver 3 is bound, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver 4 is corresponding to receiver 5
  • the HARQ-ACK information after binding the HARQ-ACK information.
  • the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to each of the time slot 1, the time slot 2 and the time slot 3 is the same.
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook received by the second device from the first device includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receivers on time units in the first time unit group. According to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the second device determines the corresponding HARQ-ACK information received by the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group, where the physical channel reception schedules the physical channel received by the first device for the second device .
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to at least one of the following:
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 1.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 2.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 3 .
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 2 and information 3 .
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 1, information 2, and information 3.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook may be determined according to one or more of information 1, information 2, and information 3 and other information.
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
  • the numbers of feedback bits corresponding to different candidate physical channel receivers are the same or different.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver is 1, and when the first time unit group includes 5 candidate physical channel receivers, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is 5.
  • the first time unit group includes: one candidate physical channel receiver opportunity 1 and two candidate physical channel receiver opportunities 2, wherein the number of feedback bits corresponding to one candidate physical channel receiver opportunity 1 is 1, and one The number of feedback bits corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunity 2 is 2, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is 5.
  • the information 2 represents the number of feedback bits corresponding to any candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in a time unit.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to different candidate physical channel receivers in one time unit is the same or different.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to one physical channel receiver in one time unit is 1, and the first time unit group includes 3 time units , then the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is 3.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit and the number of time units included in the first time unit group.
  • the first time unit group includes two time units, wherein each time unit includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is 1, then the first HARQ- The number of feedback bits in the ACK codebook is 2.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to the number of feedback bits corresponding to one time unit, and one time unit corresponds to The number of feedback bits is determined according to the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver in a time unit and the number of candidate physical channel receivers in a time unit.
  • the first time unit group includes two time units, wherein each time unit includes two candidate physical channel receiver opportunities, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is 1, then each time unit The number of feedback bits corresponding to the unit is 2, and the number of bits of the HARQ-ACK information in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is 4.
  • the first time unit group includes two time units, and the time is determined according to the number of candidate physical channel receivers in one time unit and the number of feedback bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver in the time unit
  • the number of feedback bits N1 corresponding to a unit according to the number of candidate physical channel receivers on another time unit and the number of feedback bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver on this time unit, determine the number of feedback bits N2 corresponding to this time unit, Then the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is N1+N2.
  • the first time unit group is the first time slot group
  • the first time slot group includes two time slots, one of which includes two candidate physical channel receiver opportunities, and the feedback bit corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity number is 1, another time slot includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is 4, then the number of feedback bits corresponding to the two time slots are 2 and 4 respectively, the first The number of feedback bits in one HARQ-ACK codebook is 6.
  • the first candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits, and the first candidate physical channel receiver schedules a physical channel corresponding to the first control information format the circumstances of receipt; and/or,
  • the second candidate physical channel receivers in the first time unit group correspond to the second number of feedback bits, and the second candidate physical channel receivers correspond to the situation that the first control information format schedules reception of at least two physical channels.
  • the candidate physical channel receivers on the first time unit group may include at least one of the following:
  • the first candidate physical channel receiver will schedule a physical channel corresponding to the first control information format
  • the second candidate physical channel receiver may schedule at least two physical channels corresponding to the first control information format.
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit include one or more first candidate physical channel receiver opportunities.
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit include one or more second candidate physical channel receiver opportunities.
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit include one or more first candidate physical channel receiver opportunities and one or more second candidate physical channel receiver opportunities.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first candidate physical channel receiver is the first number Y of feedback bits.
  • one row in the TDRA table corresponds to one SLIV
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
  • the first control information corresponding to the row of SLIV2-1 in the TDRA table schedules a physical channel
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to SLIV2-1 is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
  • SLIV2-1 is the SLIV included in the second SLIV row
  • SLIV1-1 and SLIV1-2 are the SLIVs included in the first SLIV row.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the second candidate physical channel receiver is the second number X of feedback bits.
  • one SLIV row in the TDRA table includes four SLIVs, and the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to any SLIV among the four SLIVs is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
  • SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, and SLIV1-4 are scheduled for the same first control information, that is, the first control information schedules 4 physical channels, then SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2,
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to any one of SLIV1-3 and SLIV1-4 is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group includes at least one of the following situations:
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and one of the time unit receiver opportunities
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver is the larger value of the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the first feedback bit number;
  • Case 3 The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the second feedback bit number.
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity
  • the number of bits of a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the time unit is X and Larger value of Y.
  • the number of bits of a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the time unit is Y.
  • the number of bits of a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the time unit is X.
  • the time unit group corresponding to time slot n includes: time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-3, time slot n-2, SLIV1-1 and
  • the physical channel corresponding to SLIV1-2 can be scheduled by the same first control information, and the physical channel corresponding to SLIV2-1 can be scheduled by another first control information, then the time slot n-6 includes a second candidate physical channel receiving opportunity , time slot n-5 includes a second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and a first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, time slot n-3 includes a second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and time slot n-2 includes a The second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and one first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, then the HARQ-ACK codebook on the slot n includes the slot n-6, slot n-5, slot n-4, slot Table 4 shows the number of feedback bits corresponding to n-3 and time slot n-2.
  • a candidate physical channel receiver on a first time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits
  • One candidate physical channel receiver on the second time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the second number of feedback bits.
  • the first time unit includes a time unit whose time domain offset from the first feedback time unit is the first time domain offset, where the first time domain offset is a plurality of physical The time domain offset between the time unit of the last physical channel in the channel and the first feedback time unit, that is, the time unit of the last physical channel among the multiple physical channels scheduled for a first control information format in the first time unit unit of time.
  • the second time unit is a time unit other than the first time unit in the first time unit group.
  • the first feedback time slot is time slot n, assuming that the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set includes ⁇ 2, 5 ⁇ , then the first time domain offset is ⁇ 2, 5 ⁇ ,
  • the first time unit is time slot n-2; when the first time domain offset is 5, the first time unit is n-5, then in the feedback time slot n
  • the first time unit includes: time slot n-2 and time slot Slot n-5
  • the second time unit includes: time slot n-3 and time slot n-6.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to one candidate physical channel receiver is the first number Y of feedback bits.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to one candidate physical channel receiver is the second number X of feedback bits.
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to the code block group CBG feedback length
  • the first number of feedback bits is 1.
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to the corresponding TB feedback length when scheduling a physical channel in the first control information format
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to the corresponding CBG feedback length when a physical channel is scheduled in the first control information format.
  • the first number of feedback bits is the TB feedback length (that is, the configured maximum number of TBs).
  • the TB feedback length is the corresponding TB feedback length when the first control information format schedules a physical channel.
  • the first device when the first device receives the first control information corresponding to the first control information format and schedules a physical channel, the corresponding maximum number of TBs is 2, and the first number of feedback bits is 2.
  • the first number of feedback bits is TB feedback length*CBG feedback length (that is, the configured maximum number of TBs*the configured maximum number of CBGs).
  • the TB feedback length is the corresponding TB feedback length when the first control information format schedules a physical channel
  • the CBG feedback length is the corresponding CBG feedback length when the first control information format schedules a physical channel.
  • the first device when the first device receives the first control information corresponding to the first control information format to schedule a physical channel, the corresponding maximum number of TBs is 2, the maximum number of CBGs is 4, and the first number of feedback bits is 8.
  • the second number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
  • the second number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
  • the second feedback bit number is 1;
  • the second feedback bit number is 1;
  • the second number of feedback bits is 1.
  • the second number of feedback bits is determined according to the TB feedback length corresponding to each physical channel when the first control information format schedules multiple physical channels.
  • the spatial domain bundling feedback can be understood as the bundling of HARQ-ACK information of two codewords. Only the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the two codewords is ACK, and the waiting The feedback information is ACK; if the HARQ-ACK information of any one of the two codewords is NACK, the information to be fed back after the two codewords are bundled is NACK. If only one codeword is scheduled, for another unscheduled codeword, it is assumed that its corresponding HARQ-ACK information is ACK.
  • the time-domain bundling feedback can be understood as the HARQ-ACK information bundling of N candidate physical channel receivers, and only the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the N candidate physical channel receivers is ACK, then the N The information to be fed back after the bundling of candidate physical channel receivers is ACK; if the HARQ-ACK information of any one of the N candidate physical channel receivers is NACK, the N candidate physical channel receivers are bound The determined feedback information is NACK.
  • N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the first device when configured with airspace binding feedback, perform airspace binding feedback.
  • the first device when configured with time-domain bundling feedback, it performs time-domain bundling feedback.
  • the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver is decoding information after the corresponding physical channel is received.
  • the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver is ACK.
  • N is predefined, or N is determined according to configuration parameters of network devices such as time domain bonding feedback parameters.
  • the N candidate physical channel receivers correspond to one candidate physical channel receiver scheduled by the first control information format.
  • the N candidate physical channel receiver opportunities are consecutive N candidate physical channel receiver opportunities among the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities included in the first time unit group.
  • the position of the information to be fed back in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is at least one of the N candidate physical channel receivers The position of the feedback information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver in the first HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • the position of the information to be fed back in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is one of the N candidate physical channel receivers
  • the position of the information to be fed back in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is the feedback information corresponding to the last or first candidate physical channel receiver among the N candidate physical channel receivers in the first HARQ-ACK codebook. - position in the ACK codebook.
  • the second feedback bit number is a bit number corresponding to a second candidate physical channel receiver.
  • the number of bits corresponding to a second candidate physical channel receiver is 1, and the second feedback bit number is 1.
  • the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits are different.
  • the first feedback bit number is 2, and the second feedback bit number is 1. In yet another example, the first feedback bit number is 1, and the second feedback bit number is 2. In this embodiment of the present application, there may be no limitation on the sizes of the first feedback bit number and the second feedback bit number.
  • the first number of feedback bits is greater than or equal to the second number of feedback bits.
  • the first feedback bit number is 2, and the second feedback bit number is 1. In yet another example, the first feedback bit number is 4, and the second feedback bit number is 1.
  • the feedback bit number of a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity in the time unit is the first feedback bit number.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one of the following:
  • At least one line of symbol start length in the TDRA table indicates SLIV, wherein one SLIV corresponds to one candidate physical channel receiving opportunity.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to a TDRA table.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, TDRA.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one row of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set includes at least one piece of HARQ feedback timing indication information.
  • the TDRA table includes at least one SLIV row, wherein the number of SLIVs included in one SLIV row is less than or equal to M.
  • the TDRA table includes indication information indicating the time domain offset of the interval between receiving opportunities of different candidate physical channels scheduled by the same DCI.
  • the indication information indicates a time domain offset between the DCI and its scheduled candidate physical channel receiving opportunity.
  • the indication information indicates the time domain offset between the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity scheduled by the same DCI.
  • the first feedback is determined according to TDRA
  • the time unit for the candidate physical channel receiving opportunity determines the time between the time unit corresponding to the last candidate physical channel receiving opportunity among the multiple candidate physical channel receiving opportunities scheduled by the same DCI and the first feedback time unit time interval, so as to determine the time units included in the first time unit group.
  • the TDRA table includes two rows of SLIV, the first row of SLIV includes: SLIV1-1 and SLIV1-2, corresponding to continuous slot scheduling, and the second row of SLIV includes: SLIV2-1, HARQ feedback
  • the time series set includes ⁇ 2, 5 ⁇ , then the time units in the first time unit group include: time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-3 and time slot n-2.
  • the TDRA table includes two rows of SLIV, the first row of SLIV includes: SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3 and SLIV1-4, corresponding to continuous slot scheduling, the second row of SLIV Including: SLIV2-1, the HARQ feedback timing set includes ⁇ 2, 4 ⁇ , then the time units in the first time unit group include: time slot n-7, time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-4, slot n-3, and slot n-2.
  • the TDRA table includes two rows of SLIV, the first row of SLIV includes: SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4, and between SLIV1-2 and SLIV1-3 discontinuous, the second time-domain offsets (for example, represented by k0) corresponding to each SLIV are 0, 1, 3, 4, where k0 is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity scheduled by the same first control information format and The time domain offset between each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the second row of SLIV includes: SLIV2-1, the HARQ feedback timing set includes ⁇ 2, 4 ⁇ , then the time units in the first time unit group include: time Slot n-8, slot n-7, slot n-6, slot n-5, slot n-4, slot n-3, and slot n-2.
  • the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, including:
  • the first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set, where , the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the time domain offset between the first time unit and the first feedback time unit is the first time domain offset k1.
  • k1 is determined by the configured HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the configured HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set includes 2 and 5, and the value of k1 includes 2 and 5.
  • one or more pieces of HARQ feedback timing indication information may be configured in the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the last SLIV in the first SLIV row of the TDRA table.
  • the first SLIV includes SLIV1-2 and SLIV2-1
  • the first time unit includes: time slot n-5 and time slot n-2, that is, slot n-5 corresponds to SLIV1-2 and SLIV2 -1, time slot n-2 corresponds to SLIV1-2 and SLIV2-1.
  • the first SLIV row refers to any row in the TDRA table.
  • the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
  • the first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; and/or,
  • the second time unit in the first time unit group is a time unit corresponding to a second SLIV, and the second SLIV is a time unit other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV.
  • Each SLIV row in the TDRA table includes at least one SLIV, and in the case that one SLIV row corresponds to one SLIV, the SLIV row only includes the first SLIV. In the case that one SLIV line corresponds to multiple SLIVs, the SLIV line includes the first SLIV and the second SLIV.
  • the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV is the first time unit
  • the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV is the second time unit.
  • the first SLIV included in the SLIV1 row is SLIV1-2
  • the second SLIV included in the SLIV2 row is SLIV1-1
  • the first SLIV included in the SLIV2 row is SLIV2-1
  • SLIV1- 2 The time unit corresponding to SLIV2-1 is the first time unit
  • the time unit corresponding to SLIV1-1 is the second time unit.
  • the first SLIV included in the SLIV1 row is SLIV1-4
  • the second SLIV included in the SLIV1 row is SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, and SLIV1-3
  • the first SLIV included in the SLIV2 row is SLIV2-1
  • the time units corresponding to SLIV1-4 and SLIV2-1 are the first time unit
  • the time units corresponding to SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, and SLIV1-3 are the second time unit.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are based on at least one row in the TDRA table
  • the symbol start length indicates what SLIV determines, including:
  • the first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
  • the second time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the last one in the first SLIV group in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain bonding feedback parameters.
  • multiple SLIVs in the first SLIV row correspond to a group
  • multiple candidate physical channel receivers corresponding to the first SLIV row can be bound
  • the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the row is bundled into one HARQ-ACK information to be fed back.
  • the HARQ-ACK information to be fed back corresponds to the first time unit in the HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first The time unit is the time unit corresponding to the last SLIV in the first SLIV row.
  • the time-domain bundling feedback parameter includes N, and N is greater than 1.
  • the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to multiple candidate physical channel receivers corresponding to the first SLIV row is bundled into 1 bit.
  • the TDRA table includes two rows of SLIV, and one row of SLIV includes 3 SLIVs: SLIV1 ⁇ SLIV 3, then the SLIV group corresponding to this row of SLIV includes SLIV1 ⁇ 3, and the first time unit includes the time unit corresponding to SLIV3 ;
  • Another row of SLIVs includes 5 SLIVs: SLIV4-SLIV 8, then the SLIV group corresponding to this row of SLIVs includes SLIV4-8, and the first time unit includes the time unit corresponding to SLIV8.
  • multiple SLIVs in the first SLIV row correspond to multiple SLIV groups
  • the first SLIV group is any SLIV group
  • the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the channel receiver is bound as one HARQ-ACK information to be fed back.
  • the HARQ-ACK information to be fed back corresponds to the second time unit in the HARQ-ACK codebook
  • the second time unit is the corresponding The time unit corresponding to the last SLIV in the first SLIV group. It should be understood that, in this case, the time unit corresponding to the last SLIV in the last SLIV group among the multiple SLIV groups may also be considered as the first time unit.
  • a row of SLIVs includes 8 SLIVs: SLIV1-SLIV 8, and according to the time-domain bonding feedback parameters, it is determined that 4 candidate physical channel receivers are likely to be bonded, then the row of SLIVs includes 2 groups of SLIVs, namely SLIV1 ⁇ 4, SLIV5 ⁇ 8, the second time unit is the time unit corresponding to SLIV4 and SLIV8. Wherein, the time unit corresponding to SLIV8 may also be considered as the first time unit.
  • the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to the TDRA table, including:
  • the time domain offset between the second time unit in the first time unit group and the first time unit is a second time domain offset, and the second time domain offset is based on the TDRA table determined, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the first device determines the second time domain offset according to the TDRA table, and determines the second time unit according to the determined second time domain offset and the first time unit.
  • the first SLIV row includes at least two SLIVs
  • the second time domain offset is determined according to the TDRA table, including:
  • the second time domain offset is determined according to at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
  • the second time domain offset is the time domain offset between the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV in the TDRA table and the first time unit, and the second SLIV is the time domain offset in the TDRA table
  • the second time domain offset is at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the second time domain offset is a time domain offset between the first SLIV and the second SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the SLIV is an effective SLIV.
  • a valid SLIV may be understood as the symbol corresponding to the SLIV does not include an uplink symbol.
  • the SLIV is considered to be an invalid SLIV.
  • the SLIV is an effective SLIV comprising:
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is effectively scheduled; or,
  • the first device may be scheduled to perform physical channel reception according to the SLIV.
  • the first device can receive the physical channel according to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity scheduled by SLIV, wherein there is a possibility of transmitting a physical channel on a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, that is, the first device can receive the physical channel on the candidate physical channel Opportunistically receive the physical channel scheduled by the first control information.
  • the first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is based on the HARQ feedback timing in the HARQ feedback timing set Determined by the indication information, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last valid SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the first device is received by a physical channel scheduled by a first control information
  • the first control information indicates the first SLIV row in the TDRA table
  • the last SLIV in the first SLIV row corresponds to time unit n
  • the penultimate A SLIV corresponds to time unit n-1
  • the HARQ feedback timing indication information corresponding to the first control information is K1 wherein, the last SLIV is not a valid SLIV (or the SLIV is an invalid SLIV), and the penultimate SLIV is If SLIV is valid, the feedback time unit corresponding to the first control information (or the physical channel reception scheduled by the first control information) is time unit n-1+K1.
  • the first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is based on the HARQ feedback timing in the HARQ feedback timing set determined by the indication information, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last configured SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the first SLIV may or may not be a valid SLIV.
  • the first device is received by a physical channel scheduled by a first control information
  • the first control information indicates the first SLIV row in the TDRA table
  • the last SLIV in the first SLIV row corresponds to time unit n
  • the penultimate A SLIV corresponds to time unit n-1
  • the HARQ feedback timing indication information corresponding to the first control information is K1 wherein, the last SLIV is not a valid SLIV (or the SLIV is an invalid SLIV), and the penultimate SLIV is If SLIV is valid, the feedback time unit corresponding to the first control information (or the physical channel reception scheduled by the first control information) is time unit n+K1.
  • the second device sends to the first device first control information for scheduling transmission of at least one physical channel
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the at least one physical channel
  • the first control information received by the first device schedules at least one physical channel for transmission, the first control information corresponds to the first control information format, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the at least one physical channel Corresponding HARQ-ACK information.
  • the second device sends first control information to the first device, and the number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information is S, where S is less than or equal to M.
  • the first control information may indicate the SLIV row in the TDRA table, and the physical channel corresponding to the SLIV scheduled by the SLIV row indicated by the first control information is the physical channel scheduled by the first control information.
  • M is 4, and the TDRA table is as follows:
  • Line 1 SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4;
  • Line 2 SLIV2-1, SLIV2-2;
  • the first control information further includes a HARQ feedback timing indication, and the HARQ feedback timing indication is used to determine a value in the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the first control information may not include the HARQ feedback timing indication, and at this time, K1 is the value included in the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the first control information sent by the second device to the first device is used to schedule at least one physical channel, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook fed back by the first device to the second device includes the HARQ codebook of at least one physical channel scheduled by the first control information. -ACK information.
  • the first control information sent by the second device to the first device is used to schedule physical channel 1 and physical channel 2
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook fed back by the first device to the second device includes: physical channel 1 HARQ-ACK information corresponding to physical channel 2.
  • a first physical channel of the at least one physical channel corresponds to a first time unit, wherein a candidate physical channel receiver on the first time unit corresponds to a first feedback bit number Y, and the The first physical channel corresponds to the second number of feedback bits X, and the first number of feedback bits is different from the second number of feedback bits.
  • the number of bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the first time unit is the first number of feedback bits
  • the first physical channel is fed back in the first feedback time unit
  • the number of bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the first physical channel is the second number of feedback bits.
  • the number of bits allocated for the first time unit in the HARQ-ACK codebook is different from the number of bits actually required by the first time unit.
  • the first number Y of feedback bits is greater than the second number X of feedback bits.
  • the second feedback bit number X is smaller than the first feedback bit number Y, and the X HARQ-ACK information bits corresponding to the first physical channel are located in the Y HARQ-ACK information bits The first X HARQ-ACK information bits of .
  • the fed back HARQ-ACK information occupies part of the allocated bits.
  • the bundling feedback mode of the first device is: perform space-domain bundling first, and then time-domain bundling.
  • the bundling feedback method of the first device is: first Binding in the air domain, followed by binding in the time domain.
  • the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback and air-domain bundling feedback, or the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback but not configured with air-domain bundling feedback, when the physical When the TB feedback length corresponding to the channel is greater than 1 (or the number of codewords corresponding to the physical channel to be bundled and fed back is greater than 1), the first device needs to perform spatial domain After the bundling feedback, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the physical channel is obtained, and then the time-domain bundling feedback is performed on the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to different physical channels.
  • the second device determines at least two codewords according to one piece of HARQ-ACK information in the first HARQ-ACK codebook HARQ-ACK information.
  • the second device determines that the first device is configured with spatial domain bundling feedback
  • the received HARQ-ACK information is ACK
  • the received In the case that the HARQ-ACK information of the given information is NACK
  • the two bundled HARQ-ACK information are both NACK.
  • the second device determines at least two HARQ-ACK information of physical channels.
  • the second device determines that the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback
  • the received HARQ-ACK information of one physical channel is ACK
  • determine the The HARQ-ACK information is all ACK.
  • the received HARQ-ACK information of a physical channel is NACK
  • the first device when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the first device assumes that HARQ-ACK information corresponding to unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers is ACK when performing time-domain bundling.
  • the second device assumes that HARQ-ACK information corresponding to unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers is ACK.
  • N physical channel bonding feedback is configured, but the number of scheduled physical channels is less than N, for the unscheduled physical channels, it is assumed that the corresponding feedback information is ACK.
  • the first device is a terminal
  • the second device is a network device
  • the physical channel includes a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH
  • the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include uplink feedback resources
  • the first device is a first terminal
  • the second device is a second terminal
  • the physical channel includes a PSSCH
  • the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include sidelink feedback resources.
  • the uplink feedback resources include PUCCH resources or physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) resources.
  • PUCCH resources Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH
  • the sidelink feedback resources include: Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel, PSFCH) resources.
  • Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel, PSFCH
  • the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
  • the embodiment of this application considers that the network device can use one piece of control information such as DCI to schedule at least two physical channels such as PDSCH transmission, or can use one piece of control information to activate at least two downlink resources for at least two physical channel transmissions (wherein, the at least Two downlink resources may belong to the same SPS resource configuration, and may also belong to different SPS resource configurations), the determination of the candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities in the semi-static codebook, and the terminal device determines the corresponding semi-static codebook, Thus, semi-static codebook feedback is performed.
  • the first device such as a terminal device, is configured with a first control information format, where the maximum number of physical channels that can be scheduled in the first control information format or the maximum number of time slots M corresponding to physical channels that can be scheduled is greater than or equal to 2 .
  • the first device receives the first control information format sent by the second device, the first control information format schedules transmission of S physical channels, S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to M, and the S physical channels are At least one physical channel corresponds to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook corresponds to the first feedback resource.
  • the first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook by using the first feedback resource.
  • the first control information format configured on the first device means that the first device can detect the first control information format; the first control information format received by the first device means that the first device receives the first control information format through detection.
  • M refers to the maximum number of physical channels that can be scheduled by the first control information format;
  • S refers to the number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information corresponding to the first control information format currently received.
  • the TDRA form is as follows:
  • the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
  • the size of the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to the M value.
  • one feedback slot corresponds to one HARQ-ACK codebook
  • one HARQ-ACK codebook corresponds to HARQ-ACK information corresponding to a group of candidate physical channel receivers included in one HARQ-ACK feedback window.
  • the first feedback resource corresponds to the first HARQ-ACK codebook
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook corresponds to HARQ-ACK information corresponding to a group of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities included in the HARQ-ACK feedback window.
  • one PUCCH slot corresponds to one HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • the physical channel includes a PDSCH
  • the first device includes a terminal device
  • the second device includes a network device
  • the first control information format includes a DCI format
  • the physical channel includes a sidelink physical channel
  • the first device includes a first terminal device
  • the second device includes a second terminal device or a network device.
  • the first control information format includes a sidelink control information format or a DCI format.
  • the first feedback resources include uplink resources.
  • the first feedback resources include PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources.
  • the first feedback resources include sidewalk resources.
  • the first feedback resources include PSFCH resources.
  • the time domain position of the first feedback resource is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the first control information format, where the HARQ feedback timing indication information is used to indicate the HARQ feedback timing set or, the time domain position of the first feedback resource is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, wherein the first control information format does not include HARQ feedback timing indication information, and/or, Only one value is included in the HARQ feedback timing set.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set is configured by a high layer parameter, or the HARQ feedback timing set is preset.
  • the time domain position of the first feedback resource is determined according to K1, wherein the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the first control information format indicates the K1 value included in the HARQ feedback timing set, or the HARQ feedback timing set Only the K1 value is included in the first control information format and the HARQ feedback timing indication information is not included in the first control information format.
  • the K1 value is used to indicate: if the end position of the last physical channel among the S physical channels is at time slot n, the first feedback resource is located at time slot n+K1.
  • the K1 value is used to indicate: if the end position of the last SLIV among the S SLIVs is in time slot n, the first feedback resource is located in time slot n+K1.
  • the last SLIV is the SLIV configured in the TDRA table, or, the last SLIV is a valid SLIV.
  • a group of candidate physical channel receivers corresponding to a feedback time slot is determined according to at least one of the M value, the S value and the K1 value.
  • the group of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set and the TDRA table, wherein the TDRA table is also used to determine the M value and/or the S value.
  • the downlink time slots corresponding to a group of candidate PDSCH receivers are determined according to at least one of the TDRA table, M value, S value and K1 value.
  • the number of HARQ-ACK feedback bits corresponding to a downlink time slot is based on at least one of the number of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities included in the downlink time slot and the maximum number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate PDSCH receiver opportunity definite.
  • the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot is determined according to the TDRA table.
  • the TDRA table includes N rows, each row corresponding to at least one SLIV value.
  • the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot is determined according to the effective SLIV scheduling in the TDRA table. For example, if at least one of the symbols corresponding to the PDSCH indicated by a certain SLIV value indicated by a row in the TDRA table is an uplink symbol when associated with the downlink time slot, the SLIV value is considered to correspond to invalid scheduling.
  • the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot is determined according to the effective SLIV scheduling and K1 in the TDRA table.
  • the TDRA table configured by the terminal device includes 2 rows, the first row 1 DCI schedules 4 candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities, and the corresponding SLIVs are ⁇ SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4 ⁇ and assume The 4 candidate PDSCH receivers are located in 4 consecutive time slots, the second row schedules 1 candidate PDSCH receiver with 1 DCI, and the corresponding SLIV is SLIV2-1.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set includes two K1 values, which are ⁇ 2, 4 ⁇ respectively, and the HARQ-ACK feedback window corresponding to feedback time slot n (or the downlink time slot corresponding to feedback time slot n) is shown in Figure 8.
  • K0 includes an indication of the time domain offset between the first PDSCH scheduled by a DCI and the PDSCHs scheduled by the DCI, such as a time slot interval, or, K0 includes the difference between a DCI and each PDSCH scheduled by the DCI An indication of the time-domain offset between slots, such as slot spacing.
  • the TDRA table configured by the terminal device includes 2 rows, the first row 1 DCI schedules 4 candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities, and the corresponding SLIVs are ⁇ SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4 ⁇ and assume The four candidate PDSCH receivers are located in discontinuous time slots in the time domain (for example, the corresponding K0 values are 0, 1, 3, and 4 respectively, indicating that the first PDSCH scheduled by a DCI and each PDSCH scheduled by the DCI interval between slots), the second row schedules one candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity for one DCI, and the corresponding SLIV is SLIV2-1.
  • the HARQ feedback timing set includes two K1 values, which are ⁇ 2, 4 ⁇ respectively, then the HARQ-ACK feedback window corresponding to feedback slot n (or the downlink slot corresponding to feedback slot n) is shown in Figure 9. It includes time slot n-8, time slot n-7, time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-4, time slot n-3 and time slot n-2.
  • the determination of the number of HARQ-ACK feedback bits corresponding to a downlink time slot involves the following two situations:
  • Case 1 The number of bits X corresponding to each candidate physical channel opportunity when the terminal device is configured to receive multiple physical channels scheduled by one DCI is different from the bit number Y corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity when one DCI schedules one physical channel. where X is less than or equal to Y.
  • the maximum number of TB or the maximum number of bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver is 1.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device is configured with one DCI scheduling multiple physical channels, the maximum number of TB or the maximum number of bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is 1, and the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity in the case of one DCI scheduling one physical channel
  • each candidate physical channel receiver will feed back in TB and the maximum number of TB or the maximum number of bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver is 1.
  • time slot n-4 or time slot n-2 is X
  • the corresponding X bits of a certain physical channel in the case of one DCI scheduling multiple physical channels to be fed back then The X bits occupy the first X bit positions among the Y bit positions.
  • the feedback position corresponding to time slot n-4 in the HARQ-ACK codebook feeds back the HARQ- ACK information, NACK ⁇ ;
  • the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to ⁇ SLIV1-2 is fed back at the feedback position corresponding to time slot n-4 in the HARQ-ACK codebook, NACK ⁇ ;
  • the feedback position corresponding to time slot n-4 in the HARQ-ACK codebook is fed back ⁇ the first in the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to SLIV2-1 bit, the second bit in the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to SLIV2-1 ⁇ .
  • Case 2 The terminal device is configured with time-domain binding feedback, or the terminal device is configured with the corresponding bit number Z when one DCI schedules multiple physical channels, or the terminal device is configured with one DCI to schedule multiple physical channels with multiple candidate physical channels At least two candidate physical channel receivers among the receivers combine feedback.
  • the terminal device if the terminal device is configured with air domain bundling feedback and configured with time domain bundling feedback, the terminal device performs air domain bundling first and then time domain bundling.
  • the terminal device if the number of feedback bits corresponding to a physical channel to be fed back by the terminal device is greater than 1, and the terminal device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the terminal device first performs the feedback bit number corresponding to a physical channel Binding, and then time domain binding.
  • the time-domain bundling feedback may be configured by the network device, or the time-domain bundling feedback may be predefined.
  • the terminal device is configured with at least one candidate physical channel receiver set, where each candidate physical channel receiver set corresponds to 1 feedback bit.
  • the position of the feedback bit corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver group in the HARQ-ACK codebook is the feedback bit corresponding to the last candidate physical channel receiver in the candidate physical channel receiver group in the HARQ-ACK position in the codebook.
  • the terminal device is configured with at least one SLIV group, where each SLIV group corresponds to 1 feedback bit.
  • the position of the feedback bit corresponding to each SLIV group in the HARQ-ACK codebook is the position of the feedback bit corresponding to the last SLIV in the SLIV group in the HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • the last SLIV is the SLIV configured in the TDRA table, or, the last SLIV is a valid SLIV.
  • each downlink time slot in the HARQ-ACK codebook to be fed back on the PUCCH on time slot n The corresponding number of bits is shown in Table 7:
  • the bound bits of SLIV1-1 to SLIV1-4 correspond to time domain binding
  • SLIV2-1 does not correspond to binding
  • the bound bits of SLIV2-1 correspond to air domain binding.
  • the slot group corresponding to the feedback slot n only includes slot n-4 and slot n-2, and the HARQ-ACK codebook only includes 2 bits, which can reduce overhead.
  • the bits after binding SLIV1-1 and SLIV1-2 correspond to time domain binding
  • the bits after binding SLIV1-3 and SLIV1-4 correspond to time domain binding
  • SLIV2-1 does not correspond to binding
  • SLIV2-1 binds
  • the determined bits correspond to the airspace binding.
  • the time slot group corresponding to the feedback time slot n only includes time slot n-6, time slot n-4 and time slot n-2, and the HARQ-ACK codebook only includes 3 bits, which can reduce overhead.
  • the first device such as a terminal device is configured with a first control information format, wherein the maximum number of physical channels or the maximum number of time slots M that can be scheduled by the first control information format is greater than or equal to 2;
  • the first device receives the first control information format sent by the second device, the first control information format schedules transmission of S physical channels, S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to M, and the S physical channels are At least one physical channel corresponds to a first HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook corresponds to a first feedback resource;
  • the first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook by using the first feedback resource.
  • different physical channels among the S physical channels are used to transmit different TBs.
  • the number of HARQ-ACK feedback bits corresponding to a downlink time slot is based on the number of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities included in the downlink time slot and the maximum feedback number corresponding to a candidate PDSCH receiver opportunity At least one of the number of bits is determined.
  • the downlink time slots corresponding to a group of candidate PDSCH receivers are determined according to at least one of TDRA table, M value, S value, K0 value and K1 value.
  • the terminal device may be configured with time-domain bonding feedback, or the terminal device may be configured by The number of bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver when one DCI is configured to schedule multiple physical channels is different from the bit number corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver when one DCI schedules one physical channel.
  • the overhead of the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook determined by the solution in this application can be effectively reduced, and it can also avoid inconsistencies in the understanding of the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook by the network device and the terminal device.
  • sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes do not mean the order of execution, and the order of execution of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not be used in this application.
  • the implementation of the examples constitutes no limitation.
  • the terms “downlink”, “uplink” and “sidelink” are used to indicate the transmission direction of signals or data, wherein “downlink” is used to indicate that the transmission direction of signals or data is sent from the station The first direction to the user equipment in the cell, “uplink” is used to indicate that the signal or data transmission direction is the second direction sent from the user equipment in the cell to the station, and “side line” is used to indicate that the signal or data transmission direction is A third direction sent from UE1 to UE2.
  • “downlink signal” indicates that the transmission direction of the signal is the first direction.
  • the term “and/or” is only an association relationship describing associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships. Specifically, A and/or B may mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or” relationship.
  • FIG 10 is a schematic diagram of the structural composition of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device provided by the embodiment of the present application, which is applied to the first device.
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device includes:
  • the first determining unit 1001 is configured to determine a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group, The time units in the first time unit group correspond to the first feedback time unit;
  • the sending unit 1002 is configured to send the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to at least one of the following:
  • the number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit in the first time unit group is the number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit in the first time unit group.
  • the first candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits, and the first candidate physical channel receiver corresponds to the case where a physical channel is scheduled to be received by the first control information format; and/ or,
  • the second candidate physical channel receivers in the first time unit group correspond to the second number of feedback bits, and the second candidate physical channel receivers correspond to the situation that the first control information format schedules reception of at least two physical channels.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group includes at least one of the following situations:
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the receiver is the larger value of the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits;
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The number of first feedback bits;
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The second feedback bit number.
  • a candidate physical channel receiver on a first time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits
  • a candidate physical channel receiver on a second time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the second number of feedback bits.
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to the code block group CBG feedback length
  • the first number of feedback bits is 1.
  • the second number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
  • the second number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
  • the second feedback bit number is 1;
  • the second feedback bit number is 1;
  • the second number of feedback bits is 1.
  • the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits are different.
  • the first number of feedback bits is greater than or equal to the second number of feedback bits.
  • the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to at least one of the following: HARQ feedback timing set, time domain resource allocation TDRA table, at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table , where one SLIV corresponds to one candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, including:
  • the first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set, where , the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
  • the first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; and/or,
  • the second time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the time unit other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
  • the first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
  • the third time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the last one in the first SLIV group in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain bonding feedback parameters.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the TDRA table, including:
  • the time domain offset between the second time unit in the first time unit group and the first time unit is a second time domain offset, and the second time domain offset is based on the TDRA table determined, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the first SLIV row includes at least two SLIVs
  • the second time domain offset is determined according to the TDRA table, including:
  • the second time domain offset is determined by at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
  • the second time domain offset is based on the time domain offset between the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV in the TDRA table and the first time unit, and the second SLIV is the time domain offset in the TDRA table
  • the SLIV is an effective SLIV.
  • the SLIV is an effective SLIV comprising:
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is effectively scheduled; or,
  • the first device may be scheduled to perform physical channel reception according to the SLIV.
  • the first control information received by the first device schedules at least one physical channel
  • the first control information corresponds to the first control information format
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the at least one physical channel
  • a first physical channel of the at least one physical channel corresponds to a first time unit, wherein a candidate physical channel receiver on the first time unit corresponds to a first feedback bit number Y, and the The first physical channel corresponds to the second number of feedback bits X, and the first number of feedback bits is different from the second number of feedback bits.
  • the second feedback bit number X is smaller than the first feedback bit number Y, and the X HARQ-ACK information bits corresponding to the first physical channel are located in the Y HARQ-ACK information bits The first X HARQ-ACK information bits of .
  • the bundling feedback mode of the first device is:
  • the air domain binding is performed first, and then the time domain binding is performed.
  • the bundling feedback mode of the first device is:
  • the air domain binding is performed first, and then the time domain binding is performed.
  • the first device when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the first device assumes that HARQ-ACK information corresponding to unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers is ACK when performing time-domain bundling.
  • the first device is a terminal
  • the second device is a network device
  • the physical channel includes a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH
  • the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include uplink feedback resources
  • the first device is a first terminal
  • the second device is a second terminal
  • the physical channel includes a physical sidelink shared channel PSSCH
  • the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include sidelink feedback resources.
  • the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of the structural composition of the feedback device of the HARQ-ACK codebook provided by the embodiment of the present application, which is applied to the second device.
  • the feedback device of the HARQ-ACK codebook includes:
  • the receiving unit 1101 is configured to receive the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit;
  • the second determining unit 1102 is configured to determine, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the corresponding HARQ-ACK information received by the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group;
  • the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
  • the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to at least one of the following:
  • the number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit in the first time unit group is the number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit in the first time unit group.
  • the first candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits, and the first candidate physical channel receiver schedules a physical channel corresponding to the first control information format the circumstances of receipt; and/or,
  • the second candidate physical channel receivers in the first time unit group correspond to the second number of feedback bits, and the second candidate physical channel receivers correspond to the situation that the first control information format schedules reception of at least two physical channels.
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group includes at least one of the following situations:
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit
  • the number of feedback bits corresponding to the receiver is the larger value of the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits;
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The number of first feedback bits;
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The second feedback bit number.
  • a candidate physical channel receiver on a first time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits
  • a candidate physical channel receiver on a second time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the second number of feedback bits.
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
  • the first number of feedback bits is determined according to the code block group CBG feedback length
  • the first number of feedback bits is 1.
  • the second number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
  • the second number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
  • the second feedback bit number is 1;
  • the second feedback bit number is 1;
  • the second number of feedback bits is 1.
  • the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits are different.
  • the first number of feedback bits is greater than or equal to the second number of feedback bits.
  • the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to at least one of the following: HARQ feedback timing set, time domain resource allocation TDRA table, at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table , where one SLIV corresponds to one candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, including:
  • the first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set, where , the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
  • the first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; and/or,
  • the second time unit in the first time unit group is a time unit corresponding to a second SLIV, and the second SLIV is a time unit other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
  • the first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
  • the second time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the last one in the first SLIV group in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain bonding feedback parameters.
  • the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the TDRA table, including:
  • the time domain offset between the second time unit in the first time unit group and the first time unit is a second time domain offset, and the second time domain offset is based on the TDRA table determined, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first initial length indication SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  • the first SLIV row includes at least two SLIVs
  • the second time domain offset is determined according to the TDRA table, including:
  • the second time domain offset is determined according to at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
  • the second time domain offset is based on the time domain offset between the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV in the TDRA table and the first time unit, and the second SLIV is the time domain offset in the TDRA table
  • the SLIV is an effective SLIV.
  • the SLIV is an effective SLIV comprising:
  • the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is effectively scheduled; or,
  • the first device may be scheduled to perform physical channel reception according to the SLIV.
  • the second device sends first control information for scheduling at least one physical channel to the first device, the first control information corresponds to the first control information format, and the first
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the at least one physical channel.
  • a first physical channel of the at least one physical channel corresponds to a first time unit, wherein a candidate physical channel receiver on the first time unit corresponds to a first feedback bit number Y, and the The first physical channel corresponds to the second number of feedback bits X, and the first number of feedback bits is different from the second number of feedback bits.
  • the second feedback bit number X is smaller than the first feedback bit number Y, and the X HARQ-ACK information bits corresponding to the first physical channel are located in the Y HARQ-ACK information bits The first X HARQ-ACK information bits of .
  • the second device determines at least two HARQ-ACK information of codewords.
  • the second device determines at least HARQ-ACK information of two physical channels.
  • the second device when the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the second device assumes that HARQ-ACK information corresponding to unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers is ACK.
  • the first device is a terminal
  • the second device is a network device
  • the physical channel includes a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH
  • the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include uplink feedback resources
  • the first device is a first terminal
  • the second device is a second terminal
  • the physical channel includes a physical sidelink shared channel PSSCH
  • the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include sidelink feedback resources.
  • the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1200 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be a first device or a second device, wherein the first device may be a terminal device, and the second device may be a terminal device or a network.
  • the communication device 1200 shown in FIG. 12 includes a processor 1210, and the processor 1210 can invoke and run a computer program from a memory, so as to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1200 may further include a memory 1220 .
  • the processor 1210 can invoke and run a computer program from the memory 1220, so as to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1220 may be an independent device independent of the processor 1210 , or may be integrated in the processor 1210 .
  • the communication device 1200 may further include a transceiver 1230, and the processor 1210 may control the transceiver 1230 to communicate with other devices, specifically, to send information or data to other devices, or receive other Information or data sent by the device.
  • the processor 1210 may control the transceiver 1230 to communicate with other devices, specifically, to send information or data to other devices, or receive other Information or data sent by the device.
  • the transceiver 1230 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 1230 may further include antennas, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • the communication device 1200 may specifically be the first device in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1200 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. Let me repeat.
  • the communication device 1200 may specifically be the second device in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1200 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. Let me repeat.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 1300 shown in FIG. 13 includes a processor 1310, and the processor 1310 can call and run a computer program from a memory, so as to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 1300 may further include a memory 1320 .
  • the processor 1310 can invoke and run a computer program from the memory 1320, so as to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1320 may be an independent device independent of the processor 1310 , or may be integrated in the processor 1310 .
  • the chip 1300 may also include an input interface 1330 .
  • the processor 1310 can control the input interface 1330 to communicate with other devices or chips, specifically, can obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
  • the chip 1300 may also include an output interface 1340 .
  • the processor 1310 can control the output interface 1340 to communicate with other devices or chips, specifically, can output information or data to other devices or chips.
  • the chip can be applied to the first device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the chip can be applied to the second device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the second device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the second device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the chip mentioned in the embodiment of the present application may also be called a system-on-chip, a system-on-chip, a system-on-a-chip, or a system-on-a-chip.
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 1400 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 14 , the communication system 1400 includes a first device 1410 and a second device 1420 .
  • the first device 1410 can be used to realize the corresponding functions realized by the first device in the above method
  • the second device 1420 can be used to realize the corresponding functions realized by the second device in the above method. This will not be repeated here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability.
  • each step of the above-mentioned method embodiments may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other available Program logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or the processor may be any conventional processor, or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware decoding processor, or implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, register.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electronically programmable Erase Programmable Read-Only Memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or Flash.
  • the volatile memory can be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as external cache memory.
  • RAM Static Random Access Memory
  • SRAM Static Random Access Memory
  • DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access memory
  • Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM Direct Memory Bus Random Access Memory
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection Dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM), etc. That is, the memory in the embodiments of the present application is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer programs.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the first device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the second device in the embodiment of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the first device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the second device in the embodiment of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program.
  • the computer program may be applied to the first device in the embodiment of the present application, and when the computer program is run on the computer, the computer executes the corresponding process implemented by the first device in each method of the embodiment of the present application, For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the computer program can be applied to the second device in the embodiment of the present application, and when the computer program is run on the computer, the computer executes the corresponding process implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application, For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions described above are realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory,) ROM, random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc, etc., which can store program codes. .

Abstract

Embodiments of the present application provide a feedback method and apparatus for a HARQ-ACK codebook, and a communication device. The method comprises: a first device determining a first HARQ-ACK codebook, the first HARQ-ACK codebook comprising HARQ-ACK information corresponding to a candidate physical channel reception opportunity on a time unit in a first time unit group, the time unit in the first time unit group corresponding to a first feedback time unit; and the first device sending the first HARQ-ACK codebook to a second device by means of a feedback resource on the first feedback time unit, the first device being configured with a first control information format, a maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format being M, and M being greater than or equal to 2.

Description

一种HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法及装置、通信设备A HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method and device, and communication equipment 技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及移动通信技术领域,具体涉及一种混合自动重传请求应答(Hybrid Automatic Repeat-reQuest Acknowledgement,HARQ-ACK)码本的反馈方法及装置、通信设备。The embodiment of the present application relates to the technical field of mobile communication, and specifically relates to a hybrid automatic repeat-request acknowledgment (Hybrid Automatic Repeat-reQuest Acknowledgment, HARQ-ACK) codebook feedback method and device, and communication equipment.
背景技术Background technique
对于有下行业务的终端设备,网络设备可以通过携带下行授权的下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)为终端设备调度物理下行共享信道(Physical Downlink Shared Channel,PDSCH)的传输。其中,该下行授权DCI中包括物理上行链路控制信道(Physical Uplink Control Channel,PUCCH)资源的指示信息,终端设备在收到PDSCH后,将该PDSCH的译码结果(确认应答(acknowledgement,ACK)或否认应答(Negative Acknowledgement,NACK)信息)通过该PUCCH资源反馈给网络设备。但在引入一个DCI调度多个PDSCH的调度方式后,如何反馈译码结果是需要解决的技术问题。For a terminal device with downlink services, the network device can schedule the transmission of the Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) for the terminal device by carrying the downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI) of the downlink authorization. Wherein, the downlink authorization DCI includes indication information of physical uplink control channel (Physical Uplink Control Channel, PUCCH) resources, and after receiving the PDSCH, the terminal device will decode the PDSCH (acknowledgment, ACK) or negative acknowledgment (Negative Acknowledgment, NACK) information) is fed back to the network device through the PUCCH resource. However, after introducing a scheduling method in which one DCI schedules multiple PDSCHs, how to feed back the decoding result is a technical problem that needs to be solved.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法及装置、通信设备。Embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for feeding back a HARQ-ACK codebook, and a communication device.
本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法,包括:The feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook provided in the embodiment of the present application includes:
第一设备确定第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应第一反馈时间单元;The first device determines the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit in the first time unit group, the first time unit The time unit in the unit group corresponds to the first feedback time unit;
所述第一设备通过所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源向第二设备发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本;The first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法,包括:The feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook provided in the embodiment of the present application includes:
第二设备通过第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源接收第一设备发送第一HARQ-ACK码本;The second device receives the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit;
所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的物理信道接收对应的HARQ-ACK信息;The second device determines, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, that a physical channel on a time unit in the first time unit group receives corresponding HARQ-ACK information;
其中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应所述第一反馈时间单元;Wherein, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置,应用于第一设备,包括:The HARQ-ACK codebook feedback apparatus provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the first device, including:
第一确定单元,配置为确定第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应第一反馈时间单元;The first determination unit is configured to determine a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group, the The time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first feedback time unit;
发送单元,配置为通过所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源向第二设备发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本;a sending unit configured to send the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置,应用于第二设备,包括:The HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the second device, including:
接收单元,配置为通过第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源接收第一设备发送第一HARQ-ACK码本;The receiving unit is configured to receive the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit;
第二确定单元,配置为根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的物理信道接收对应的HARQ-ACK信息;The second determining unit is configured to determine, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the corresponding HARQ-ACK information received by the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group;
其中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应所述第一反馈时间单元;Wherein, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
本申请实施例提供的通信设备,可以是上述方案中的第一设备或者是上述方案中的第二设备,该通信设备包括处理器和存储器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法。The communication device provided in the embodiment of the present application may be the first device in the above solution or the second device in the above solution, and the communication device includes a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to execute the above-mentioned feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook.
本申请实施例提供的芯片,用于实现上述的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法。The chip provided by the embodiment of the present application is used to realize the above-mentioned feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook.
具体地,该芯片包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有该芯片的设备执行上述的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法。Specifically, the chip includes: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a device installed with the chip executes the above-mentioned feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook.
本申请实施例提供的计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序使得计算机执行上述的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法。The computer-readable storage medium provided by the embodiment of the present application is used for storing a computer program, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the above-mentioned HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method.
本申请实施例提供的计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行上述的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法。The computer program product provided by the embodiment of the present application includes computer program instructions, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the above-mentioned method for feedbacking the HARQ-ACK codebook.
本申请实施例提供的计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法。The computer program provided by the embodiment of the present application, when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the above HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method.
通过上述技术方案,针对一个控制信息格式调度多个物理信道的情况下,能够正确反馈译码结果,避免网络设备和终端设备对HARQ-ACK码本的理解不一致的问题的发生。Through the above technical solution, when multiple physical channels are scheduled for one control information format, the decoding result can be fed back correctly, and the problem of inconsistent understanding of the HARQ-ACK codebook by the network device and the terminal device can be avoided.
附图说明Description of drawings
此处所说明的附图用来提供对本申请的进一步理解,构成本申请的一部分,本申请的示意性实施例及其说明用于解释本申请,并不构成对本申请的不当限定。在附图中:The drawings described here are used to provide a further understanding of the application and constitute a part of the application. The schematic embodiments and descriptions of the application are used to explain the application and do not constitute an improper limitation to the application. In the attached picture:
图1是本申请实施例的一个应用场景的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例的调度PDSCH的可选地示意图;FIG. 2 is an optional schematic diagram of scheduling a PDSCH according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例的调度PDSCH的可选地示意图;FIG. 3 is an optional schematic diagram of scheduling a PDSCH according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法的可选地流程示意图;FIG. 4 is an optional flowchart of a feedback method of a HARQ-ACK codebook according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法的可选地流程示意图;FIG. 5 is an optional flowchart of a feedback method of a HARQ-ACK codebook according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法的可选地流程示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of an optional HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例的候选物理信道接收机会的可选地示意图;FIG. 7 is an optional schematic diagram of a candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例的候选物理信道接收机会的可选地示意图;FIG. 8 is an optional schematic diagram of a candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例的候选物理信道接收机会的可选地示意图;FIG. 9 is an optional schematic diagram of a candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置的可选地结构示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an optional HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置的可选地结构示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an optional structure of an apparatus for feedbacking a HARQ-ACK codebook according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备示意性结构图;Fig. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请实施例的芯片的示意性结构图;FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的示意性框图。Fig. 14 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of the present application, but not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in this application, all other embodiments obtained by persons of ordinary skill in the art without making creative efforts belong to the scope of protection of this application.
图1是本申请实施例的一个应用场景的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
如图1所示,通信系统100可以包括终端设备110和网络设备120。网络设备120可以通过空口与终端设备110通信。终端设备110和网络设备120之间支持多业务传输。As shown in FIG. 1 , a communication system 100 may include a terminal device 110 and a network device 120 . The network device 120 may communicate with the terminal device 110 through an air interface. Multi-service transmission is supported between the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 .
应理解,本申请实施例仅以通信系统100进行示例性说明,但本申请实施例不限定于此。也就是说,本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、先进的长期演进(Advanced long term evolution,LTE-A)系统、新无线(New Radio,NR)系统、NR系统的演进系统、非授权频谱上的LTE(LTE-based access to unlicensed spectrum,LTE-U)系统、非授权频谱上的NR(NR-based access to unlicensed spectrum,NR-U)系统、非地面通信网络 (Non-Terrestrial Networks,NTN)系统、物联网(Internet of Things,IoT)系统、窄带物联网(Narrow Band Internet of Things,NB-IoT)系统、增强的机器类型通信(enhanced Machine-Type Communications,eMTC)系统、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Networks,WLAN)、无线保真(Wireless Fidelity,WiFi)、第五代通信(5th-Generation,5G)系统或其他通信系统等。It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is only described by using the communication system 100 as an example, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. That is to say, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Global System of Mobile communication (Global System of Mobile communication, GSM) system, Code Division Multiple Access (Code Division Multiple Access, CDMA) system, broadband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD) , Advanced long term evolution (LTE-A) system, New Radio (NR) system, evolution system of NR system, LTE (LTE-based access to unlicensed spectrum, LTE- U) system, NR (NR-based access to unlicensed spectrum, NR-U) system on unlicensed spectrum, non-terrestrial communication network (Non-Terrestrial Networks, NTN) system, Internet of Things (Internet of Things, IoT) system, Narrow Band Internet of Things (NB-IoT) system, enhanced Machine-Type Communications (eMTC) system, Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), Wireless Local Area Network (Wireless Local Area Networks, WLAN), Wireless Fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, WiFi), fifth-generation communication (5th-Generation, 5G) system or other communication systems, etc.
在图1所示的通信系统100中,网络设备120可以是与终端设备110通信的接入网设备。接入网设备可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备110(例如UE)进行通信。In the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 , the network device 120 may be an access network device that communicates with the terminal device 110 . The access network device can provide communication coverage for a specific geographical area, and can communicate with terminal devices 110 (such as UEs) located in the coverage area.
网络设备120可以是长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者是下一代无线接入网(Next Generation Radio Access Network,NG RAN)设备,或者是NR系统中的基站(gNB),或者是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)中的无线控制器,或者该网络设备120可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备、集线器、交换机、网桥、路由器,或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的网络设备等。The network device 120 may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) system, or a Next Generation Radio Access Network (NG RAN) device, Either a base station (gNB) in the NR system, or a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (Cloud Radio Access Network, CRAN), or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable Devices, hubs, switches, bridges, routers, or network devices in the future evolution of the Public Land Mobile Network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN), etc.
终端设备110可以是任意终端设备,其包括但不限于与网络设备120或其它终端设备采用有线或者无线连接的终端设备。The terminal device 110 may be any terminal device, including but not limited to a terminal device connected to the network device 120 or other terminal devices by wire or wirelessly.
例如,所述终端设备110可以指接入终端、用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、IoT设备、卫星手持终端、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进网络中的终端设备等。For example, the terminal equipment 110 may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (User Equipment, UE), a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, user agent, or user device. Access terminals can be cellular phones, cordless phones, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phones, IoT devices, satellite handheld terminals, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) stations, Personal Digital Assistant , PDA), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in 5G networks or terminal devices in future evolution networks, etc.
终端设备110可以用于设备到设备(Device to Device,D2D)的通信。The terminal device 110 can be used for device-to-device (Device to Device, D2D) communication.
无线通信系统100还可以包括与基站进行通信的核心网设备130,该核心网设备130可以是5G核心网(5G Core,5GC)设备,例如,接入与移动性管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF),又例如,认证服务器功能(Authentication Server Function,AUSF),又例如,用户面功能(User Plane Function,UPF),又例如,会话管理功能(Session Management Function,SMF)。可选地,核心网络设备130也可以是LTE网络的分组核心演进(Evolved Packet Core,EPC)设备,例如,会话管理功能+核心网络的数据网关(Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway,SMF+PGW-C)设备。应理解,SMF+PGW-C可以同时实现SMF和PGW-C所能实现的功能。在网络演进过程中,上述核心网设备也有可能叫其它名字,或者通过对核心网的功能进行划分形成新的网络实体,对此本申请实施例不做限制。The wireless communication system 100 may also include a core network device 130 that communicates with the base station. The core network device 130 may be a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC) device, for example, Access and Mobility Management Function (Access and Mobility Management Function , AMF), and for example, authentication server function (Authentication Server Function, AUSF), and for example, user plane function (User Plane Function, UPF), and for example, session management function (Session Management Function, SMF). Optionally, the core network device 130 may also be a packet core evolution (Evolved Packet Core, EPC) device of the LTE network, for example, a data gateway (Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway, SMF+PGW- C) equipment. It should be understood that SMF+PGW-C can realize the functions of SMF and PGW-C at the same time. In the process of network evolution, the above-mentioned core network equipment may be called by other names, or a new network entity may be formed by dividing functions of the core network, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
通信系统100中的各个功能单元之间还可以通过下一代网络(next generation,NG)接口建立连接实现通信。Various functional units in the communication system 100 may also establish a connection through a next generation network (next generation, NG) interface to implement communication.
例如,终端设备通过NR接口与接入网设备建立空口连接,用于传输用户面数据和控制面信令;终端设备可以通过NG接口1(简称N1)与AMF建立控制面信令连接;接入网设备例如下一代无线接入基站(gNB),可以通过NG接口3(简称N3)与UPF建立用户面数据连接;接入网设备可以通过NG接口2(简称N2)与AMF建立控制面信令连接;UPF可以通过NG接口4(简称N4)与SMF建立控制面信令连接;UPF可以通过NG接口6(简称N6)与数据网络交互用户面数据;AMF可以通过NG接口11(简称N11)与SMF建立控制面信令连接;SMF可以通过NG接口7(简称N7)与PCF建立控制面信令连接。For example, the terminal device establishes an air interface connection with the access network device through the NR interface to transmit user plane data and control plane signaling; the terminal device can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (N1 for short); access Network equipment such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with UPF through NG interface 3 (abbreviated as N3); access network equipment can establish control plane signaling with AMF through NG interface 2 (abbreviated as N2) connection; UPF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 4 (abbreviated as N4); UPF can exchange user plane data with the data network through NG interface 6 (abbreviated as N6); AMF can communicate with SMF through NG interface 11 (abbreviated as N11) The SMF establishes a control plane signaling connection; the SMF may establish a control plane signaling connection with the PCF through an NG interface 7 (N7 for short).
图1示例性地示出了一个基站、一个核心网设备和两个终端设备,可选地,该无线通信系统100可以包括多个基站设备并且每个基站的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Figure 1 exemplarily shows a base station, a core network device, and two terminal devices. Optionally, the wireless communication system 100 may include multiple base station devices and each base station may include other numbers of terminals within the coverage area. The device is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
需要说明的是,图1只是以示例的形式示意本申请所适用的系统,当然,本申请实施例所示的方法还可以适用于其它系统。此外,本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。还应理解,在本申请的实施例中提到的“指示”可以是直接指示,也可以是间接指示,还可以是表示具有关联关系。举例说明,A指示B,可以表示A直接指示B,例如B可以通过A获取;也可以表示A间接指示B,例如A指示C,B可以通过C获取;还可以表示A和B之间具有关联关系。还应理解,在本申请的实施例中提到的“对应”可表示两者之间具有直接对应或间接对 应的关系,也可以表示两者之间具有关联关系,也可以是指示与被指示、配置与被配置等关系。还应理解,在本申请的实施例中提到的“预定义”或“预定义规则”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。比如预定义可以是指协议中定义的。还应理解,本申请实施例中,所述"协议"可以指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。It should be noted that FIG. 1 is only an illustration of a system applicable to this application, and of course, the method shown in the embodiment of this application may also be applicable to other systems. Furthermore, the terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably herein. The term "and/or" in this article is just an association relationship describing associated objects, which means that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and there exists alone B these three situations. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. It should also be understood that the "indication" mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a direct indication, may also be an indirect indication, and may also mean that there is an association relationship. For example, A indicates B, which can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also indicate that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, and B can be obtained through C; it can also indicate that there is an association between A and B relation. It should also be understood that the "correspondence" mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may mean that there is a direct correspondence or an indirect correspondence between the two, or that there is an association between the two, or that it indicates and is indicated. , configuration and configured relationship. It should also be understood that the "predefined" or "predefined rules" mentioned in the embodiments of this application can be used by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other It is implemented by indicating related information, and this application does not limit the specific implementation. For example, pre-defined may refer to defined in the protocol. It should also be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the "protocol" may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, and this application does not limit this .
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,以下对本申请实施例的相关技术进行说明,以下相关技术作为可选方案与本申请实施例的技术方案可以进行任意结合,其均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。In order to facilitate the understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the related technologies of the embodiments of the present application are described below. The following related technologies can be combined with the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application as optional solutions, and all of them belong to the embodiments of the present application. protected range.
高频相关背景High Frequency Correlation Background
随着NR系统的演进,NR系统的研究可以包括新频段,例如52.6GHz-71GHz或71GHz-114.25GHz。新频段中可以包括授权频谱,也可以包括非授权频谱。或者说,新频段中包括专用频谱,也包括共享频谱。With the evolution of the NR system, the research of the NR system may include new frequency bands, such as 52.6GHz-71GHz or 71GHz-114.25GHz. The new frequency band may include licensed spectrum or unlicensed spectrum. In other words, the new frequency band includes dedicated spectrum and shared spectrum.
非授权频谱是国家和地区划分的可用于无线电设备通信的频谱,该频谱通常被认为是共享频谱,即不同通信系统中的通信设备只要满足国家或地区在该频谱上设置的法规要求,就可以使用该频谱,不需要向政府申请专用的频谱授权。The unlicensed spectrum is the spectrum allocated by the country and region that can be used for radio device communication. This spectrum is usually considered a shared spectrum, that is, communication devices in different communication systems can be used as long as they meet the regulatory requirements set by the country or region on the spectrum. To use this spectrum, there is no need to apply for a dedicated spectrum authorization from the government.
为了让使用非授权频谱进行无线通信的各个通信系统在该频谱上能够友好共存,一些国家或地区规定了使用非授权频谱必须满足的法规要求。例如,通信设备遵循“先听后说(Listen Before Talk,LBT)”原则,或者说,通信设备需要进行信道接入过程。即通信设备在非授权频谱的信道上进行信号发送前,需要先进行信道监听(sensing),只有当信道监听成功时,该通信设备才能进行信号发送;如果通信设备在非授权频谱的信道上的信道监听失败,该通信设备不能进行信号发送。In order to allow various communication systems that use unlicensed spectrum for wireless communication to coexist friendly on this spectrum, some countries or regions have stipulated regulatory requirements that must be met when using unlicensed spectrum. For example, the communication device follows the "Listen Before Talk (LBT)" principle, or in other words, the communication device needs to perform a channel access process. That is, before a communication device transmits a signal on an unlicensed spectrum channel, it needs to perform channel sensing (sensing). Only when the channel monitoring is successful, the communication device can perform signal transmission; The channel monitoring fails, and the communication device cannot send signals.
●信道监听成功:也称为LBT成功或信道监听空闲。例如对信道进行的监听时隙内的能量检测低于能量检测门限。● Channel monitoring success: also called LBT success or channel monitoring idle. For example, the energy detection performed on the channel in the listening time slot is lower than the energy detection threshold.
●信道监听失败:也称为LBT失败或信道监听忙碌。例如对信道进行的监听时隙内的能量检测高于或等于能量检测门限。● Channel listening failure: also called LBT failure or channel listening busy. For example, the energy detection performed on the channel in the listening time slot is higher than or equal to the energy detection threshold.
新频段考虑的子载波间隔可以比现有NR系统支持的子载波间隔更大,目前的候选子载波间隔包括以下几种中的至少一种:240kHz、480kHz、960kHz、1.92MHz、3.84MHz。作为示例,一些候选子载波间隔下对应的参数集(Numerology)如表1所示。The subcarrier spacing considered in the new frequency band may be larger than the subcarrier spacing supported by the existing NR system. The current candidate subcarrier spacing includes at least one of the following: 240kHz, 480kHz, 960kHz, 1.92MHz, 3.84MHz. As an example, the corresponding parameter sets (Numerology) under some candidate subcarrier spacings are shown in Table 1.
表1、FRX频段的候选子载波间隔对应的参数集示例Table 1. Examples of parameter sets corresponding to candidate subcarrier spacing in the FRX frequency band
子载波间隔subcarrier spacing 符号长度symbol length NCP长度NCP length ECP长度ECP length 符号带NCP长度Symbol with NCP length 时隙长度slot length
240kHz240kHz 4.16μs4.16μs 0.2902μs0.2902μs 1.04μs1.04μs 4.452μs4.452μs 62.5μs62.5μs
480kHz480kHz 2.08μs2.08μs 0.146μs0.146μs 0.52μs0.52μs 2.226μs2.226μs 31.25μs31.25μs
960kHz960kHz 1.04μs1.04μs 0.073μs0.073μs 0.26μs0.26μs 1.113μs1.113μs 15.625μs15.625μs
NR系统中的半静态码本反馈Semi-static Codebook Feedback in NR Systems
对于有下行业务的终端设备,网络设备可以通过下行授权DCI为终端设备调度PDSCH的传输。其中,该下行授权DCI中包括PUCCH资源的指示信息,终端设备在收到PDSCH后,将该PDSCH的译码结果(ACK或NACK信息)通过该PUCCH资源反馈给网络设备。其中,在NR系统中支持动态确定HARQ反馈时序。网络设备通过DCI调度终端设备进行PDSCH接收,其中,该DCI中包括用于传输该PDSCH对应的HARQ-ACK的PUCCH资源的指示信息。For a terminal device with downlink services, the network device can schedule the transmission of the PDSCH for the terminal device through the downlink grant DCI. Wherein, the downlink grant DCI includes PUCCH resource indication information, and after receiving the PDSCH, the terminal equipment feeds back the decoding result (ACK or NACK information) of the PDSCH to the network equipment through the PUCCH resource. Wherein, the NR system supports dynamic determination of the HARQ feedback timing. The network device schedules the terminal device to receive the PDSCH through the DCI, where the DCI includes indication information of the PUCCH resource used to transmit the HARQ-ACK corresponding to the PDSCH.
该指示信息可以包括:The instructions can include:
●PUCCH资源指示(PUCCH resource indicator):用于确定PUCCH资源;PUCCH resource indicator (PUCCH resource indicator): used to determine PUCCH resources;
●HARQ反馈时序指示(PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator):用于动态确定HARQ反馈资源的时域位置,例如HARQ反馈资源的时隙,通常用K1表示。●HARQ feedback timing indicator (PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator): used to dynamically determine the time domain position of the HARQ feedback resource, such as the time slot of the HARQ feedback resource, usually represented by K1.
该HARQ反馈时序指示用于指示HARQ反馈时序集合中的取值。其中,HARQ反馈时序集合可以是预设的或网络设备配置的,HARQ反馈时序集合中包括至少一个K1值。The HARQ feedback timing indication is used to indicate the value in the HARQ feedback timing set. Wherein, the HARQ feedback timing set may be preset or configured by the network device, and the HARQ feedback timing set includes at least one K1 value.
如果HARQ反馈时序集合中只包括一个K1值,则DCI中可以不包括HARQ反馈时序指示,HARQ反馈资源的时域位置根据该HARQ反馈时序集合中的该K1值确定。If only one K1 value is included in the HARQ feedback timing set, the HARQ feedback timing indication may not be included in the DCI, and the time domain position of the HARQ feedback resource is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set.
作为示例,HARQ反馈时序集合是预设的,预设值为{1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8}。HARQ反馈时序指示信息包括3比特,该3比特指示信息与该8个值一一映射。具体地,该HARQ反馈时序指示信息为000时,表示K1=1;该HARQ反馈时序指示信息为001时,表示K1=2,等等。可选地,在该情况下,DCI对应的DCI格式为回退DCI格式例如DCI格式1_0。As an example, the HARQ feedback timing set is preset, and the preset value is {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8}. The HARQ feedback timing indication information includes 3 bits, and the 3-bit indication information is mapped to the 8 values one by one. Specifically, when the HARQ feedback timing indication information is 000, it means K1=1; when the HARQ feedback timing indication information is 001, it means K1=2, and so on. Optionally, in this case, the DCI format corresponding to the DCI is a fallback DCI format such as DCI format 1_0.
作为另一示例,网络设备配置的HARQ反馈时序集合中包括4个值,HARQ反馈时序指示信息包 括2比特。该HARQ反馈时序指示信息为00时,指示HARQ反馈时序集合中的第一个值,该HARQ反馈时序指示信息为01时,指示HARQ反馈时序集合中的第二个值,等等。其中,如果HARQ反馈时序集合中包括无效K1(例如对应的K1值为-1),当HARQ反馈时序指示信息指示该无效K1时,则表示PUCCH资源所在的时隙暂不确定。可选地,HARQ反馈时序集合是网络设备配置的,DCI对应的DCI格式为非回退DCI格式例如DCI格式1_1或DCI格式1_2。DCI中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息包括的比特数是根据HARQ反馈时序集合中包括的值的个数确定的。As another example, the HARQ feedback timing set configured by the network device includes 4 values, and the HARQ feedback timing indication information includes 2 bits. When the HARQ feedback timing indication information is 00, it indicates the first value in the HARQ feedback timing set; when the HARQ feedback timing indication information is 01, it indicates the second value in the HARQ feedback timing set, and so on. Wherein, if the HARQ feedback timing set includes invalid K1 (for example, the corresponding K1 value is -1), when the HARQ feedback timing indication information indicates the invalid K1, it means that the time slot where the PUCCH resource is located is temporarily uncertain. Optionally, the HARQ feedback timing set is configured by the network device, and the DCI format corresponding to the DCI is a non-fallback DCI format such as DCI format 1_1 or DCI format 1_2. The number of bits included in the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the DCI is determined according to the number of values included in the HARQ feedback timing set.
终端设备在进行HARQ-ACK反馈时包括半静态码本反馈例如Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本反馈或Type-3 HARQ-ACK码本反馈和动态码本反馈例如Type-2或eType-2 HARQ-ACK码本反馈。When the terminal device performs HARQ-ACK feedback, it includes semi-static codebook feedback such as Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback or Type-3 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback and dynamic codebook feedback such as Type-2 or eType-2 HARQ- ACK codebook feedback.
如果终端设备被配置了Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本反馈,Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本中包括一个HARQ-ACK反馈窗口内的候选PDSCH接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息。If the terminal device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback, the Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to a candidate PDSCH receiver within the HARQ-ACK feedback window.
在Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本反馈中,对于没有重复传输的PDSCH,如果终端设备在时隙n上收到了PDSCH,则终端设备应在时隙n+k上反馈该PDSCH对应的HARQ-ACK信息;对于重复传输次数为R的PDSCH,如果终端设备在时隙n-R+1到时隙n上收到了PDSCH,则终端设备应在时隙n+k上反馈该PDSCH对应的HARQ-ACK信息;如果终端设备在时隙n上收到了释放半持续调度(Semi-Persistent Scheduling,SPS)PDSCH配置的DCI,则终端设备应在时隙n+k上反馈该DCI对应的ACK信息。其中,对于在多个时隙上重复传输的PDSCH,时隙n+k是根据该多个时隙中的最后一个时隙为参考的。该时隙n+k可以认为是反馈时隙,k是根据HARQ反馈时序集合中的K1值确定的。如果终端设备需要在非时隙n+k的其他反馈时隙上反馈该PDSCH对应的HARQ-ACK信息,则该PDSCH对应的HARQ-ACK信息设置为NACK信息。In Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback, for a PDSCH without repeated transmission, if the terminal device receives the PDSCH on time slot n, the terminal device should feed back the HARQ-ACK corresponding to the PDSCH on time slot n+k Information; for the PDSCH with the number of repeated transmissions R, if the terminal device receives the PDSCH from time slot n-R+1 to time slot n, the terminal device should feed back the HARQ-ACK corresponding to the PDSCH on time slot n+k Information; if the terminal device receives the DCI for releasing the semi-persistent scheduling (Semi-Persistent Scheduling, SPS) PDSCH configuration on time slot n, the terminal device should feed back the ACK information corresponding to the DCI on time slot n+k. Wherein, for the PDSCH repeatedly transmitted in multiple time slots, the time slot n+k is based on the last time slot in the multiple time slots as a reference. The time slot n+k can be regarded as a feedback time slot, and k is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set. If the terminal device needs to feed back the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the PDSCH in other feedback time slots other than the time slot n+k, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the PDSCH is set as NACK information.
一个反馈时隙对应一个HARQ-ACK反馈窗口内包括的一组候选PDSCH接收机会。该组候选PDSCH接收机会是根据HARQ反馈时序集合中的K1值和时域资源分配(Time domain resource assignment,TDRA)表格确定的。如果终端设备接收到一组候选PDSCH接收机会中的至少部分PDSCH(包括调度的PDSCH和/或SPS PDSCH)的调度,且该至少部分PDSCH对应的反馈时隙为该反馈时隙,则在该反馈时隙上传输的HARQ-ACK码本中包括该至少部分PDSCH对应的HARQ-ACK信息,例如,在该反馈时隙上传输的Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本中该至少部分PDSCH对应的位置上反馈对应的HARQ-ACK信息。对于未被调度的候选PDSCH接收机会或未被指示通过该反馈时隙反馈的PDSCH,在该反馈时隙上传输的Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本中的对应位置上设置为NACK信息。One feedback slot corresponds to a group of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities included in one HARQ-ACK feedback window. The group of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set and the time domain resource assignment (Time domain resource assignment, TDRA) table. If the terminal equipment receives the scheduling of at least part of the PDSCH (including the scheduled PDSCH and/or SPS PDSCH) in a group of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities, and the feedback time slot corresponding to the at least part of the PDSCH is the feedback time slot, then in the feedback The HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on the time slot includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to at least part of the PDSCH, for example, at the position corresponding to the at least part of the PDSCH in the Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on the feedback time slot Feedback the corresponding HARQ-ACK information. For the unscheduled candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity or the PDSCH not indicated to be fed back through the feedback slot, the corresponding position in the Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on the feedback slot is set as NACK information.
一个反馈时隙对应一个HARQ-ACK反馈窗口内的一组候选PDSCH接收机会是根据HARQ反馈时序集合中的K1值和TDRA表格确定的。具体地,K1值用于确定候选PDSCH接收机会对应的至少一个下行时隙,TDRA表格用于确定与一个下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会的个数。如果终端设备没有指示在一个时隙内接收多个单播PDSCH的能力,则一个下行时隙对应一个候选PDSCH接收机会。A feedback time slot corresponds to a group of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities within a HARQ-ACK feedback window, which is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set and the TDRA table. Specifically, the K1 value is used to determine at least one downlink time slot corresponding to a candidate PDSCH receiver opportunity, and the TDRA table is used to determine the number of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot. If the terminal device does not indicate the ability to receive multiple unicast PDSCHs within one time slot, one downlink time slot corresponds to one candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity.
作为示例,TDRA表格包括N行,每行对应一个起始长度指示(Start and Length Indicators,SLIV)值。如果TDRA表格中的某一行对应的SLIV指示的PDSCH在关联下行时隙时出现该PDSCH对应的符号中至少有一个是上行符号,则该行被认为对应无效调度,即该行不用于确定候选PDSCH接收机会。在TDRA表格中包括的对应有效调度的行中,先根据每一行对应的SLIV值确定候选PDSCH接收机会的结束符号位置最早的行对应的结束符号的符号索引m1,即m1为该有效调度的行对应的结束符号中最小的符号索引值,下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会个数加一,所有起始符号的符号索引值小于或等于m1的候选PDSCH接收机会对应的行都对应相同的该候选PDSCH接收机会;然后,在TDRA表格中排除上述所有起始符号的符号索引值小于或等于m1的候选PDSCH接收机会对应的行,在TDRA表格中包括的剩余的对应有效调度的行中,再根据每一行对应的SLIV值确定候选PDSCH接收机会的结束符号位置最早的行对应的结束符号的符号索引m2,再重复上述过程,直到遍历TDRA表格中的所有行。As an example, the TDRA table includes N rows, and each row corresponds to a Start and Length Indicators (SLIV) value. If at least one of the symbols corresponding to the PDSCH indicated by the SLIV corresponding to a certain row in the TDRA table is an uplink symbol when the downlink slot is associated, the row is considered to correspond to invalid scheduling, that is, the row is not used to determine the candidate PDSCH Receive opportunities. In the rows corresponding to the effective scheduling included in the TDRA table, first determine the symbol index m1 of the end symbol corresponding to the row corresponding to the earliest end symbol position of the candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity according to the SLIV value corresponding to each row, that is, m1 is the effective scheduling row The smallest symbol index value in the corresponding end symbol, the number of candidate PDSCH receivers corresponding to the downlink slot plus one, and the rows corresponding to the candidate PDSCH receivers whose symbol index value is less than or equal to m1 all correspond to the same Candidate PDSCH receivers; then, in the TDRA table, exclude the rows corresponding to the candidate PDSCH receivers whose symbol index values of all the start symbols are less than or equal to m1, in the remaining rows corresponding to effective scheduling included in the TDRA table, and then Determine the symbol index m2 of the end symbol corresponding to the row with the earliest end symbol position of the candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity according to the SLIV value corresponding to each row, and repeat the above process until all rows in the TDRA table are traversed.
作为示例而非限定,TDRA表格中包括3行SLIV:SLIV1、SLIV2和SLIV3,假设对于一个PUCCH反馈时隙,该3行SLIV对应一个下行时隙(例如时隙中不包括上行符号),则该3行SLIV均为有效SLIV。其中,假设SLIV1调度符号2~5,SLIV2调度符号3~6,SLIV3调度符号7~13。上述3行SLIV中结束符号位置最早的是SLIV1,对应的符号索引即m1为符号5,即该下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会的个数为1;再判断SLIV2的起始符号,SLIV2的起始符号为符号3,在符号5之前,因此SLIV2和SLIV1对应相同的候选PDSCH接收机会(即由于SLIV1和SLIV2部分符号重叠,网络设备一次只会调度其中1个);对于剩余的SLIV(即SLIV3),重复上述过程,结束符号位置最早的是SLIV3,对应的符号索引m2为符号13,该下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会个数加1,即该下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会个数为2,也就是说,在该示例中,该PUCCH反馈时隙对应的该下行时隙对应2个候选PDSCH接收机会。As an example and not a limitation, the TDRA table includes 3 rows of SLIV: SLIV1, SLIV2, and SLIV3. Assuming that for a PUCCH feedback slot, the 3 rows of SLIV correspond to a downlink slot (for example, the slot does not include uplink symbols), then the All 3 lines of SLIV are valid SLIV. It is assumed that SLIV1 schedules symbols 2-5, SLIV2 schedules symbols 3-6, and SLIV3 schedules symbols 7-13. The earliest end symbol position in the above three lines of SLIV is SLIV1, and the corresponding symbol index m1 is symbol 5, that is, the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to the downlink time slot is 1; then judge the start symbol of SLIV2, and the number of SLIV2 The starting symbol is symbol 3, before symbol 5, so SLIV2 and SLIV1 correspond to the same candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities (that is, because some symbols of SLIV1 and SLIV2 overlap, the network device will only schedule one of them at a time); for the remaining SLIV (ie SLIV3), repeat the above process, the earliest end symbol position is SLIV3, the corresponding symbol index m2 is symbol 13, the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to the downlink time slot is increased by 1, that is, the candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to the downlink time slot The number is 2, that is, in this example, the downlink time slot corresponding to the PUCCH feedback time slot corresponds to 2 candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities.
可选地,TDRA表格中的行可以关联候选PDSCH接收机会或关联SPS PDSCH释放。Optionally, rows in the TDRA table may be associated with candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities or associated with SPS PDSCH releases.
图2给出了一个Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本反馈的示例。假设网络设备配置的HARQ反馈时序集合中包括4个值,分别为{2,3,4,5},则反馈时隙n对应的HARQ-ACK反馈窗口包括时隙n-5、时隙n-4、时隙n-3和时隙n-2,反馈时隙n+1对应的HARQ-ACK反馈窗口包括时隙n-4、时隙n-3、时隙n-2和时隙n-1。假设终端设备没有指示在一个时隙内接收多个单播PDSCH的能力,则一个下行时隙对应一个候选PDSCH接收机会。Figure 2 shows an example of Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback. Assuming that the HARQ feedback timing set configured by the network device includes 4 values, namely {2, 3, 4, 5}, the HARQ-ACK feedback window corresponding to the feedback time slot n includes time slot n-5, time slot n- 4. Timeslot n-3 and timeslot n-2, the HARQ-ACK feedback window corresponding to feedback timeslot n+1 includes timeslot n-4, timeslot n-3, timeslot n-2 and timeslot n- 1. Assuming that the terminal device does not indicate the ability to receive multiple unicast PDSCHs in one time slot, one downlink time slot corresponds to one candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity.
如图2所示,如果终端设备在时隙n-5上收到的DCI中的K1指示5且该DCI调度PDSCH1;在时隙n-3上收到的DCI中的K1指示3且该DCI调度PDSCH2;在时隙n-2上收到的DCI中的K1指示3且该DCI调度PDSCH3;在时隙n-1上收到的DCI中的K1指示2且该DCI调度PDSCH4,则终端设备在时隙n上反馈PDSCH1和PDSCH2的译码结果,在时隙n+1上反馈PDSCH3和PDSCH4的译码结果。As shown in Figure 2, if K1 in the DCI received by the terminal device on time slot n-5 indicates 5 and the DCI schedules PDSCH1; K1 in the DCI received on time slot n-3 indicates 3 and the DCI Scheduling PDSCH2; K1 in the DCI received on time slot n-2 indicates 3 and the DCI schedules PDSCH3; K1 in the DCI received on time slot n-1 indicates 2 and the DCI schedules PDSCH4, then the terminal device The decoding results of PDSCH1 and PDSCH2 are fed back on time slot n, and the decoding results of PDSCH3 and PDSCH4 are fed back on time slot n+1.
假设一个PDSCH对应1比特HARQ-ACK信息,则在时隙n上的PUCCH1上传输的HARQ-ACK码本如表2所示:Assuming that a PDSCH corresponds to 1-bit HARQ-ACK information, the HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on PUCCH1 on slot n is shown in Table 2:
表2、HARQ-ACK码本示例Table 2, HARQ-ACK codebook example
时隙n-5slot n-5 时隙n-4slot n-4 时隙n-3slot n-3 时隙n-2time slot n-2
PDSCH1的译码结果Decoding result of PDSCH1 NACKNACK PDSCH2的译码结果Decoding result of PDSCH2 NACKNACK
在时隙n+1上的PUCCH2上传输的HARQ-ACK码本如表3所示:The HARQ-ACK codebook transmitted on PUCCH2 on slot n+1 is shown in Table 3:
表3、HARQ-ACK码本示例Table 3, HARQ-ACK codebook example
时隙n-4slot n-4 时隙n-3slot n-3 时隙n-2time slot n-2 时隙n-1time slot n-1
NACKNACK NACKNACK PDSCH3的译码结果Decoding result of PDSCH3 PDSCH4的译码结果Decoding result of PDSCH4
一个DCI调度多个下行传输One DCI schedules multiple downlink transmissions
在高频系统中,由于子载波间隔较大,因此每个时隙占用的时间长度较短。如果延用低频系统中每个时隙进行PDSCH调度的方式,会要求终端设备在每个时隙都要检测PDCCH,从而要求终端设备具有较强的处理能力。为了减少对终端设备的处理能力要求,可以考虑引入一个DCI调度多个物理信道的调度方式。In high-frequency systems, each time slot occupies a shorter length of time due to the larger spacing between subcarriers. If the method of PDSCH scheduling for each time slot in the low-frequency system is continued, the terminal equipment will be required to detect the PDCCH in each time slot, thus requiring the terminal equipment to have strong processing capabilities. In order to reduce the processing capacity requirements of the terminal equipment, it may be considered to introduce a scheduling mode in which one DCI schedules multiple physical channels.
以下行传输为例,网络设备可以使用一个DCI调度至少两个物理信道例如PDSCH传输,或使用一个DCI激活至少两个下行资源用于至少两个物理信道传输(其中,该至少两个下行资源可以属于相同的SPS资源配置,也可以属于不同的SPS资源配置)。该至少两个物理信道包括第一物理信道和第二物理信道。第一物理信道和第二物理信道可以用于传输不同的传输块(Transport Block,TB)。Taking downlink transmission as an example, the network device can use one DCI to schedule at least two physical channels such as PDSCH transmission, or use one DCI to activate at least two downlink resources for at least two physical channel transmissions (wherein, the at least two downlink resources can be belong to the same SPS resource configuration, or may belong to different SPS resource configurations). The at least two physical channels include a first physical channel and a second physical channel. The first physical channel and the second physical channel may be used to transmit different transport blocks (Transport Block, TB).
如图3所示,网络设备可以使用DCI0调度4个PDSCH传输,该4个PDSCH包括PDSCH0、PDSCH1、PDSCH2和PDSCH3,PDSCH0、PDSCH1、PDSCH2和PDSCH3分别用于传输不同的TB。As shown in Figure 3, the network device can use DCI0 to schedule 4 PDSCH transmissions, the 4 PDSCHs include PDSCH0, PDSCH1, PDSCH2 and PDSCH3, and PDSCH0, PDSCH1, PDSCH2 and PDSCH3 are used to transmit different TBs respectively.
终端设备可能被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道时,每个物理信道对应的比特数与一个DCI调度一个物理信道时每个物理信道对应的比特数不同。例如,终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道时每个物理信道对应的最大TB数或最大比特数为1,一个DCI调度一个物理信道时每个物理信道对应的最大TB数或最大比特数为2。又例如,终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道时每个物理信道按TB反馈,一个DCI调度一个物理信道时每个物理信道按码块组(Code Block Group,CBG)反馈。When a terminal device may be configured with one DCI to schedule multiple physical channels, the number of bits corresponding to each physical channel is different from the number of bits corresponding to each physical channel when one DCI schedules one physical channel. For example, when a terminal device is configured with one DCI to schedule multiple physical channels, the maximum number of TB or maximum number of bits corresponding to each physical channel is 1, and when one DCI schedules one physical channel, the maximum number of TB or maximum number of bits corresponding to each physical channel for 2. For another example, when a terminal device is configured with one DCI to schedule multiple physical channels, each physical channel is fed back by TB, and when one DCI is scheduled to schedule one physical channel, each physical channel is fed back by a Code Block Group (CBG).
在高频系统中,如果引入一个DCI调度多个物理信道的调度方式,且该多个物理信道用于传输不同的TB,其中,终端设备可能被配置时域绑定反馈,或者,终端设备可能被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道时每个物理信道对应的比特数与一个DCI调度一个物理信道时每个物理信道对应的比特数不同。在这些情况下,如果终端设备被配置半静态码本,如何确定半静态HARQ-ACK码本,是需要解决的问题。In a high-frequency system, if a DCI is introduced to schedule multiple physical channels, and the multiple physical channels are used to transmit different TBs, the terminal device may be configured with time-domain bonding feedback, or the terminal device may The number of bits corresponding to each physical channel when one DCI is configured to schedule multiple physical channels is different from the number of bits corresponding to each physical channel when one DCI is configured to schedule one physical channel. In these cases, if the terminal device is configured with a semi-static codebook, how to determine the semi-static HARQ-ACK codebook is a problem that needs to be solved.
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,以下通过具体实施例详述本申请的技术方案。以上相关技术作为可选方案与本申请实施例的技术方案可以进行任意结合,其均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。本申请实施例包括以下内容中的至少部分内容。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the technical solutions of the present application are described in detail below through specific examples. As optional solutions, the above related technologies may be combined with the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application in any combination, and all of them belong to the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. The embodiment of the present application includes at least part of the following content.
本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法的一种可选处理流程,应用于第一设备,如图4所示,包括以下步骤:An optional processing flow of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the first device, as shown in FIG. 4 , including the following steps:
S401、第一设备确定第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应第一反馈时间单元。S401. The first device determines a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group. The time units in a time unit group correspond to the first feedback time unit.
S402、所述第一设备通过所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源向第二设备发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本;S402. The first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法的一种可选处理流程,应用于第二设备,如图5所示,包括以下步骤:An optional processing flow of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to the second device, as shown in FIG. 5 , including the following steps:
S501、第二设备通过第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源接收第一设备发送的第一HARQ-ACK码本;S501. The second device receives the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
S502、所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息;S502. The second device determines, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group;
其中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应所述第一反馈时间单元;Wherein, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法的一种可选处理流程,应用于包括第一设备和第二设备的通信系统,如图6所示,包括以下步骤:An optional processing flow of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to a communication system including the first device and the second device, as shown in FIG. 6 , including the following steps:
S601、第一设备确定第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应第一反馈时间单元。S601. The first device determines a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group. The time units in a time unit group correspond to the first feedback time unit.
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
S602、所述第一设备通过所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源向第二设备发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本。S602. The first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device by using the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit.
S603、所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息。S603. The second device determines, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group.
本申请实施例中,时间单元可理解为时隙、符号、子时隙、子帧、毫秒、秒等中的一种。这里,为了清楚描述本申请的方案,在下述的描述,以时间单元为时隙为例,对本申请的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法进行描述。In this embodiment of the present application, the time unit may be understood as one of time slots, symbols, sub-slots, sub-frames, milliseconds, seconds, and the like. Here, in order to clearly describe the solution of the present application, in the following description, the time unit is taken as an example to describe the feedback method of the HARQ-ACK codebook of the present application.
第一设备终端设备配置第一控制信息格式,且第一控制信息格式能够调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,也就是说,M为第一控制信息格式最多可以调度的物理信道的个数。可选地,第一控制信息格式用于调度至少两个物理信道传输,或激活至少两个资源,其中,激活的至少两个资源用于传输至少两个物理信道。The terminal device of the first device is configured with the first control information format, and the maximum number of physical channels that can be scheduled by the first control information format is M, that is, M is the maximum number of physical channels that can be scheduled by the first control information format. Optionally, the first control information format is used to schedule transmission of at least two physical channels, or to activate at least two resources, where the activated at least two resources are used to transmit at least two physical channels.
可选地,第一设备为终端,第二设备为网络设备,第一控制信息格式为DCI格式,第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道为PDSCH,对应的,候选物理信道接收机会为候选PDSCH接收机会。Optionally, the first device is a terminal, the second device is a network device, the first control information format is DCI format, the physical channel scheduled by the first control information format is PDSCH, and correspondingly, the candidate physical channel receiving opportunity is a candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity Chance.
可选地,第一设备为第一终端,第二设备为第二终端,第一控制信息格式为侧行控制信息格式,第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道为物理侧行共享信道(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel,PSSCH),候选物理信道接收机会为候选PSSCH接收机会。Optionally, the first device is a first terminal, the second device is a second terminal, the first control information format is a sidelink control information format, and the physical channel scheduled by the first control information format is a physical sidelink shared channel (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH), the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is the candidate PSSCH receiver opportunity.
可选地,第一设备为终端,第二设备为网络设备,第一控制信息格式用于激活至少两个下行资源,激活的至少两个下行资源用于传输至少两个PDSCH。Optionally, the first device is a terminal, the second device is a network device, the first control information format is used to activate at least two downlink resources, and the activated at least two downlink resources are used to transmit at least two PDSCHs.
可选地,第一设备为第一终端,第二设备为第二终端,第一控制信息格式用于激活至少两个侧行资源,激活的至少两个侧行资源用于传输至少两个PSSCH。Optionally, the first device is a first terminal, the second device is a second terminal, the first control information format is used to activate at least two sidelink resources, and the activated at least two sidelink resources are used to transmit at least two PSSCH .
在第一控制信息格式用于激活至少两个资源的情况下,至少两个资源属于相同或不同的SPS资源配置。In case the first control information format is used to activate at least two resources, the at least two resources belong to the same or different SPS resource configurations.
在一些实施例中,当物理信道传输对应的子载波间隔(Subcarrier Spacing,SCS)为960kHz时,M为8。In some embodiments, when the subcarrier spacing (Subcarrier Spacing, SCS) corresponding to the physical channel transmission is 960 kHz, M is 8.
在一些实施例中,当物理信道传输对应的SCS为480kHz时,M为4。In some embodiments, when the SCS corresponding to the physical channel transmission is 480 kHz, M is 4.
在一些实施例中,M的取值是根据TDRA表格确定的。例如,M的取值是根据TDRA表格中对应最多SLIV个数的行确定的,或者,M的取值等于TDRA表格中对应最多SLIV个数的行中的SLIV个数。In some embodiments, the value of M is determined according to the TDRA table. For example, the value of M is determined according to the row corresponding to the largest number of SLIVs in the TDRA table, or the value of M is equal to the number of SLIVs in the row corresponding to the largest number of SLIVs in the TDRA table.
在一示例中,M为4,则第一设备能够检测调度以下数量的物理信道的第一控制信息格式:4个、3个、2个或1个。In an example, M is 4, then the first device can detect the first control information format that schedules the following number of physical channels: 4, 3, 2 or 1.
以M=4为例,第一设备支持的第一控制信息格式能够调度的物理信道可包括:物理信道1、物理信道2、物理信道3和物理信道4。Taking M=4 as an example, the physical channels that can be scheduled by the first control information format supported by the first device may include: physical channel 1, physical channel 2, physical channel 3, and physical channel 4.
可选地,TDRA表格中各SLIV行的SLIV的数量小于或等于M。其中,不同的SLIV用于指示 不同的候选物理信道接收机会。Optionally, the number of SLIVs in each SLIV row in the TDRA table is less than or equal to M. Wherein, different SLIVs are used to indicate different candidate physical channel receiving opportunities.
在一示例中,假设TDRA表格各行对应的SLIV如下:In an example, assume that the SLIV corresponding to each row of the TDRA table is as follows:
第1行:SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3、SLIV1-4;Line 1: SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4;
第2行:SLIV2-1、SLIV2-2;Line 2: SLIV2-1, SLIV2-2;
第3行:SLIV3-1;则在该示例中M为4。Line 3: SLIV3-1; then M is 4 in this example.
本申请实施例中,第一控制信息格式调度的多个物理信道在时域上连续或不连续。In the embodiment of the present application, the multiple physical channels scheduled by the first control information format are continuous or discontinuous in the time domain.
本申请实施例中,不同的反馈时间单元对应不同的HARQ-ACK码本。In the embodiment of the present application, different feedback time units correspond to different HARQ-ACK codebooks.
第一设备确定反馈时间单元对应的HARQ-ACK码本,并通过反馈时间单元上的反馈资源发送该反馈时间单元对应的HARQ-ACK码本至第二设备。这里,将第一反馈时间单元对应的HARQ-ACK码本称为第一HARQ-ACK码本,第一反馈时间单元为任一反馈时间单元。The first device determines the HARQ-ACK codebook corresponding to the feedback time unit, and sends the HARQ-ACK codebook corresponding to the feedback time unit to the second device through the feedback resource on the feedback time unit. Here, the HARQ-ACK codebook corresponding to the first feedback time unit is referred to as the first HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first feedback time unit is any feedback time unit.
在第一反馈时间单元所反馈的第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一反馈时间单元对应的第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息。The first HARQ-ACK codebook fed back at the first feedback time unit includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group corresponding to the first feedback time unit.
第一反馈时间单元对应的时间单元组为第一时间单元组,第一时间单元组可理解为第一反馈时间单元对应的HARQ-ACK反馈窗口或时间单元。The time unit group corresponding to the first feedback time unit is the first time unit group, and the first time unit group may be understood as a HARQ-ACK feedback window or time unit corresponding to the first feedback time unit.
可选地,第一设备为终端,第二设备为网络设备,第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源为PUCCH资源或PUSCH资源,第一时间单元组为第一反馈时间单元对应的下行时间单元。Optionally, the first device is a terminal, the second device is a network device, the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit are PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources, and the first time unit group is a downlink time unit corresponding to the first feedback time unit.
可选地,第一设备为第一终端,第二设备为第二终端,第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源为物理侧行反馈信道(Physical sidelink feedback channel,PSFCH)资源,第一时间单元组为第一反馈时间单元对应的侧行时间单元。Optionally, the first device is a first terminal, the second device is a second terminal, the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit is a physical sidelink feedback channel (Physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH) resource, and the first time unit group is the side travel time unit corresponding to the first feedback time unit.
可选地,第一时间单元组中的时间单元连续。Optionally, the time units in the first time unit group are continuous.
在一示例中,第一反馈时间单元为时隙n,时隙n对应的第一时间单元组中的时间单元包括:时隙n-5、时隙n-4、时隙n-3和时隙n-2。In an example, the first feedback time unit is time slot n, and the time units in the first time unit group corresponding to time slot n include: time slot n-5, time slot n-4, time slot n-3, and time slot n-5. Gap n-2.
可选地,第一时间单元组中的时间单元不连续。Optionally, the time units in the first time unit group are discontinuous.
在一示例中,第一反馈时间单元为时隙n,时隙n对应的第一时间单元组中的时间单元包括:时隙n-5、时隙n-4和时隙n-2。In an example, the first feedback time unit is time slot n, and time units in the first time unit group corresponding to time slot n include: time slot n-5, time slot n-4, and time slot n-2.
时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会可理解为第二设备在该时间单元上可能发送物理信道的机会即候选物理信道发送机会,或第一设备在该物理信道上可能接收物理信道的机会,即候选物理信道接收机会。The candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in the time unit can be understood as the opportunity that the second device may transmit the physical channel in the time unit, that is, the candidate physical channel transmission opportunity, or the opportunity that the first device may receive the physical channel on the physical channel, that is, Candidate physical channel receiver opportunities.
本申请实施例中,一个时间单元上包括一个或多个候选物理信道接收机会。可选地,在一个时间单元上包括一个候选物理信道接收机会,则该时间单元在第一HARQ-ACK码本中对应的HARQ-ACK信息为该候选物理信接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息。可选地,在一个时间单元上包括多个候选物理信道接收机会的情况下,则该时间单元在第一HARQ-ACK码本中对应的HARQ-ACK信息为该多个候选物理信接收机会中一个或多个候选物理信接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息。可选地,一个时间单元上包括一个候选物理信道接收机会的情况下,该时间单元对应的HARQ-ACK信息的反馈比特数,与一个时间单元上包括多个候选物理信道接收机会的情况下,该时间单元对应的HARQ-ACK信息的反馈比特数相同。可选地,一个时间单元上包括一个候选物理信道接收机会的情况下,该候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息的反馈比特数,与一个时间单元上包括多个候选物理信道接收机会的情况下,该多个候选物理信道接收机会中的每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息的反馈比特数相同。In this embodiment of the present application, one time unit includes one or more candidate physical channel receiving opportunities. Optionally, one time unit includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, then the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity. Optionally, when a time unit includes multiple candidate physical channel receiver opportunities, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is the multiple candidate physical channel receiver opportunities HARQ-ACK information corresponding to one or more candidate physical signal receivers. Optionally, when a time unit includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit, and when a time unit includes multiple candidate physical channel receiver opportunities, The number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the time unit is the same. Optionally, when a time unit includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is different from that of multiple candidate physical channel receiver opportunities included in a time unit In some cases, the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver among the plurality of candidate physical channel receivers is the same.
在一示例中,第一反馈时间单元对应的第一时间单元组包括时间单元:时隙1、时隙2和时隙3,其中,时隙1上的候选物理信道接收机会包括接收机会1和接收机会2,时隙2上的候选物理信道接收机会包括接收机会3,时隙3上的候选物理信道接收机会包括接收机会4和接收机会5,第一HARQ-ACK码本包括:接收机会1对应的HARQ-ACK信息、接收机会2对应的HARQ-ACK信息、接收机会3对应的HARQ-ACK信息、接收机会4对应的HARQ-ACK信息和接收机会5对应的HARQ-ACK信息。在另一示例中,第一反馈时间单元对应的第一时间单元组包括时间单元:时隙1、时隙2和时隙3,其中,时隙1上的候选物理信道接收机会包括接收机会1和接收机会2,时隙2上的候选物理信道接收机会包括接收机会3,时隙3上的候选物理信道接收机会包括接收机会4和接收机会5,第一HARQ-ACK码本包括:接收机会1对应的HARQ-ACK信息和接收机会2对应的HARQ-ACK信息绑定后的HARQ-ACK信息、接收机会3对应的HARQ-ACK信息、接收机会4对应的HARQ-ACK信息和接收机会5对应的HARQ-ACK信息绑定后的HARQ-ACK信息。其中,时隙1、时隙2和时隙3中的每个时隙对应的HARQ-ACK信息的反馈比特数相同。In an example, the first time unit group corresponding to the first feedback time unit includes time units: time slot 1, time slot 2, and time slot 3, where the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time slot 1 include receiver opportunity 1 and time slot 3. Receiver opportunity 2, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on time slot 2 includes receiver opportunity 3, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on time slot 3 includes receiver opportunity 4 and receiver opportunity 5, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes: receiver opportunity 1 Corresponding HARQ-ACK information, HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver opportunity 2, HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver opportunity 3, HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver opportunity 4, and HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver opportunity 5. In another example, the first time unit group corresponding to the first feedback time unit includes time units: time slot 1, time slot 2, and time slot 3, wherein the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time slot 1 include receiver opportunity 1 and receiver opportunity 2, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on time slot 2 includes receiver opportunity 3, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on time slot 3 includes receiver opportunity 4 and receiver opportunity 5, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes: receiver opportunity The HARQ-ACK information corresponding to 1 and the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver 2 are bundled, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver 3 is bound, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to receiver 4 is corresponding to receiver 5 The HARQ-ACK information after binding the HARQ-ACK information. Wherein, the number of feedback bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to each of the time slot 1, the time slot 2 and the time slot 3 is the same.
第二设备从第一设备接收的第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息。第二设备根据第一HARQ-ACK码本确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的物理信道接收对应的HARQ-ACK信息,其中,物理信道接收为第二设备调度第一设备接收的物理信道。The first HARQ-ACK codebook received by the second device from the first device includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receivers on time units in the first time unit group. According to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the second device determines the corresponding HARQ-ACK information received by the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group, where the physical channel reception schedules the physical channel received by the first device for the second device .
在一些实施例中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据以下至少之一确定:In some embodiments, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to at least one of the following:
信息1、所述第一时间单元组中的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数; Information 1. The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group;
信息2、所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数; Information 2, the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group;
信息3、所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会个数。 Information 3, the number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in a time unit in the first time unit group.
在一示例中,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据信息1确定。In an example, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 1.
在一示例中,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据信息2确定。In an example, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 2.
在一示例中,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据信息3确定。In an example, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 3 .
在一示例中,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据信息2和信息3确定。In an example, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 2 and information 3 .
在一示例中,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据信息1、信息2和信息3确定。In an example, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to information 1, information 2, and information 3.
本申请实施例中,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数可根据信息1、信息2和信息3中的一种或多种与其他信息来确定。In the embodiment of the present application, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook may be determined according to one or more of information 1, information 2, and information 3 and other information.
以第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据信息1确定为例,第一HARQ-ACK码本中包括各候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息。Taking the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook as determined according to information 1 as an example, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
可选地,不同的候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数相同或不同。Optionally, the numbers of feedback bits corresponding to different candidate physical channel receivers are the same or different.
在一示例中,一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为1,当第一时间单元组上包括有5个候选物理信道接收机会,则第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数为5。In an example, the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver is 1, and when the first time unit group includes 5 candidate physical channel receivers, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is 5.
在一示例中,所述第一时间单元组上包括有:一个候选物理信道接收机会1和两个候选物理信道接收机会2,其中一个候选物理信道接收机会1对应的反馈比特数为1,一个候选物理信道接收机会2对应的反馈比特数为2,则第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数为5。In an example, the first time unit group includes: one candidate physical channel receiver opportunity 1 and two candidate physical channel receiver opportunities 2, wherein the number of feedback bits corresponding to one candidate physical channel receiver opportunity 1 is 1, and one The number of feedback bits corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunity 2 is 2, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is 5.
以第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据信息2确定为例,信息2表征一个时间单元上任一候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数。Taking the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook as an example determined according to the information 2, the information 2 represents the number of feedback bits corresponding to any candidate physical channel receiving opportunity in a time unit.
可选地,一个时间单元上不同候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数相同或不同。Optionally, the number of feedback bits corresponding to different candidate physical channel receivers in one time unit is the same or different.
在一示例中,假设第一设备没有在一个时间单元内接收多个物理信道的能力,一个时间单元上一个物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为1,第一时间单元组包括3个时间单元,则第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数为3。In an example, assuming that the first device does not have the ability to receive multiple physical channels within one time unit, the number of feedback bits corresponding to one physical channel receiver in one time unit is 1, and the first time unit group includes 3 time units , then the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is 3.
可选地,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数和第一时间单元组包括的时间单元的个数确定。Optionally, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit and the number of time units included in the first time unit group.
在一示例中,第一时间单元组包括两个时间单元,其中每个时间单元上包括一个候选物理信道接收机会,每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为1,则第一HARQ-ACK码本的反馈比特数为2。In an example, the first time unit group includes two time units, wherein each time unit includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is 1, then the first HARQ- The number of feedback bits in the ACK codebook is 2.
以第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据信息2和信息3确定为例,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据一个时间单元对应的反馈比特数确定,一个时间单元对应的反馈比特数根据时间单元上一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数和一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会的个数确定。Taking the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook determined according to information 2 and information 3 as an example, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to the number of feedback bits corresponding to one time unit, and one time unit corresponds to The number of feedback bits is determined according to the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver in a time unit and the number of candidate physical channel receivers in a time unit.
在一示例中,第一时间单元组包括两个时间单元,其中每个时间单元上包括两个候选物理信道接收机会,每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为1,则每个时间单元对应的反馈比特数为2,第一HARQ-ACK码本的HARQ-ACK信息的比特数为4。In an example, the first time unit group includes two time units, wherein each time unit includes two candidate physical channel receiver opportunities, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is 1, then each time unit The number of feedback bits corresponding to the unit is 2, and the number of bits of the HARQ-ACK information in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is 4.
在一示例中,第一时间单元组包括两个时间单元,根据其中一个时间单元上候选物理信道接收机会的个数和该时间单元上各候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数,确定该时间单元对应的反馈比特数N1,根据另一时间单元上候选物理信道接收机会的个数和该时间单元上各候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数,确定该时间单元对应的反馈比特数N2,则第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数为N1+N2。In an example, the first time unit group includes two time units, and the time is determined according to the number of candidate physical channel receivers in one time unit and the number of feedback bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver in the time unit The number of feedback bits N1 corresponding to a unit, according to the number of candidate physical channel receivers on another time unit and the number of feedback bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver on this time unit, determine the number of feedback bits N2 corresponding to this time unit, Then the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is N1+N2.
例如,第一时间单元组为第一时隙组,第一时隙组包括两个时隙,其中一个时隙上包括两个候选物理信道接收机会,每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为1,另一个时隙上包括一个候选物理信道接收机会,且该候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为4,则该两个时隙对应的反馈比特数分别为2和4,第一HARQ-ACK码本的反馈比特数为6。For example, the first time unit group is the first time slot group, and the first time slot group includes two time slots, one of which includes two candidate physical channel receiver opportunities, and the feedback bit corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity number is 1, another time slot includes a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is 4, then the number of feedback bits corresponding to the two time slots are 2 and 4 respectively, the first The number of feedback bits in one HARQ-ACK codebook is 6.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的第一候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数,所述第一候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道接收的情况;和/或,In some embodiments, the first candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits, and the first candidate physical channel receiver schedules a physical channel corresponding to the first control information format the circumstances of receipt; and/or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二候选物理信道接收机会对应第二反馈比特数,所述第二候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度至少两个物理信道接收的情况。The second candidate physical channel receivers in the first time unit group correspond to the second number of feedback bits, and the second candidate physical channel receivers correspond to the situation that the first control information format schedules reception of at least two physical channels.
本申请实施例中,第一时间单元组上的候选物理信道接收机会可包括以下至少之一:In the embodiment of the present application, the candidate physical channel receivers on the first time unit group may include at least one of the following:
第一候选物理信道接收机会,第一候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道;The first candidate physical channel receiver will schedule a physical channel corresponding to the first control information format;
第二候选物理信道接收机会,第二候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度至少两个物理信道。The second candidate physical channel receiver may schedule at least two physical channels corresponding to the first control information format.
在一示例中,一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会包括一个或多个第一候选物理信道接收机会。In an example, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit include one or more first candidate physical channel receiver opportunities.
在一示例中,一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会包括一个或多个第二候选物理信道接收机会。In an example, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit include one or more second candidate physical channel receiver opportunities.
在一示例中,一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会包括一个或多个第一候选物理信道接收机会和一个或多个第二候选物理信道接收机会。In an example, the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit include one or more first candidate physical channel receiver opportunities and one or more second candidate physical channel receiver opportunities.
第一候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为第一反馈比特数Y。The number of feedback bits corresponding to the first candidate physical channel receiver is the first number Y of feedback bits.
在一示例中,TDRA表格中的一行中对应一个SLIV,则该SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会为第一候选物理信道接收机会。In an example, one row in the TDRA table corresponds to one SLIV, and the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
如图7所示,TDRA表格中的SLIV2-1所在行对应的第一控制信息调度一个物理信道,则SLIV2-1对应的候选物理信道接收机会为第一候选物理信道接收机会。其中,这里假设SLIV2-1为第二行SLIV行所包括的SLIV,SLIV1-1和SLIV1-2为第一行SLIV行所包括的SLIV。As shown in FIG. 7 , the first control information corresponding to the row of SLIV2-1 in the TDRA table schedules a physical channel, and the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to SLIV2-1 is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity. Wherein, here it is assumed that SLIV2-1 is the SLIV included in the second SLIV row, and SLIV1-1 and SLIV1-2 are the SLIVs included in the first SLIV row.
第二候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为第二反馈比特数X。The number of feedback bits corresponding to the second candidate physical channel receiver is the second number X of feedback bits.
在一示例中,TDRA表格中的一SLIV行中包括四个SLIV,则该四个SLIV中任一SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会为第二候选物理信道接收机会。In an example, one SLIV row in the TDRA table includes four SLIVs, and the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to any SLIV among the four SLIVs is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
如图8所示,SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3和SLIV1-4为同一第一控制信息调度,即该第一控制信息调度4个物理信道,则SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3和SLIV1-4中任一SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会为第二候选物理信道接收机会。As shown in Figure 8, SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, and SLIV1-4 are scheduled for the same first control information, that is, the first control information schedules 4 physical channels, then SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to any one of SLIV1-3 and SLIV1-4 is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数,包括以下至少一种情况:In some embodiments, the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group includes at least one of the following situations:
情况1、所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会包括所述第一候选物理信道接收机会和所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数中的较大值; Case 1. The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and one of the time unit receiver opportunities The number of feedback bits corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver is the larger value of the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits;
情况2、所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第一候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数;Case 2: The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the first feedback bit number;
情况3、所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第二反馈比特数。Case 3: The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the second feedback bit number.
对于情况1,当一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会包括第一候选物理信道接收机会和第二候选物理信道接收机会,则该时间单元对应的一个候选物理信道接收机会的比特数为X和Y中的较大值。For case 1, when the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the number of bits of a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the time unit is X and Larger value of Y.
对于情况2,当一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会包括第一候选物理信道接收机会,则该时间单元对应的一个候选物理信道接收机会的比特数为Y。For case 2, when the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the number of bits of a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the time unit is Y.
对于情况3,当一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会包括第二候选物理信道接收机会,则该时间单元对应的一个候选物理信道接收机会的比特数为X。For case 3, when the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit includes the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the number of bits of a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the time unit is X.
在图7所示的示例中,时隙n对应的时间单元组即时隙组包括:时隙n-6、时隙n-5、时隙n-3、时隙n-2,SLIV1-1和SLIV1-2对应的物理信道可以由同一个第一控制信息调度,SLIV2-1对应的物理信道可以为另一个第一控制信息调度,则时隙n-6上包括一个第二候选物理信道接收机会,时隙n-5上包括一个第二候选物理信道接收机会和一个第一候选物理信道接收机会,时隙n-3上包括一个第二候选物理信道接收机会,时隙n-2上包括一个第二候选物理信道接收机会和一个第一候选物理信道接收机会,则时隙n上的HARQ-ACK码本包括的时隙n-6、时隙n-5、时隙n-4、时隙n-3、时 隙n-2对应的反馈比特数如表4所示。In the example shown in Figure 7, the time unit group corresponding to time slot n, namely the time slot group, includes: time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-3, time slot n-2, SLIV1-1 and The physical channel corresponding to SLIV1-2 can be scheduled by the same first control information, and the physical channel corresponding to SLIV2-1 can be scheduled by another first control information, then the time slot n-6 includes a second candidate physical channel receiving opportunity , time slot n-5 includes a second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and a first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, time slot n-3 includes a second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and time slot n-2 includes a The second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and one first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, then the HARQ-ACK codebook on the slot n includes the slot n-6, slot n-5, slot n-4, slot Table 4 shows the number of feedback bits corresponding to n-3 and time slot n-2.
表4、HARQ-ACK码本示例Table 4, HARQ-ACK codebook example
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000001
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一反馈比特数;和/或,In some embodiments, a candidate physical channel receiver on a first time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits; and/or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应第二反馈比特数。One candidate physical channel receiver on the second time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the second number of feedback bits.
第一时间单元包括与第一反馈时间单元的时域偏移量为第一时域偏移量的时间单元,其中,第一时域偏移量为一个第一控制信息格式调度的多个物理信道中最后一个物理信道所在的时间单元与第一反馈时间单元之间的时域偏移量,即第一时间单元为一个第一控制信息格式调度的多个物理信道中最后一个物理信道所在的时间单元。第二时间单元为第一时间单元组中除第一时间单元之外的时间单元。The first time unit includes a time unit whose time domain offset from the first feedback time unit is the first time domain offset, where the first time domain offset is a plurality of physical The time domain offset between the time unit of the last physical channel in the channel and the first feedback time unit, that is, the time unit of the last physical channel among the multiple physical channels scheduled for a first control information format in the first time unit unit of time. The second time unit is a time unit other than the first time unit in the first time unit group.
在图7所示的示例中,第一反馈时隙为时隙n,假设HARQ反馈时序集合中的K1值包括{2,5},则第一时域偏移量为{2,5},当第一时域偏移量为2,则第一时间单元为时隙n-2,当第一时域偏移量为5,则第一时间单元为n-5,则在反馈时隙n对应的时间单元组所包括的时间单元{时隙n-6,时隙n-5,时隙n-3,时隙n-2}中,第一时间单元包括:时隙n-2和时隙n-5,第二时间单元包括:时隙n-3和时隙n-6。In the example shown in FIG. 7, the first feedback time slot is time slot n, assuming that the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set includes {2, 5}, then the first time domain offset is {2, 5}, When the first time domain offset is 2, the first time unit is time slot n-2; when the first time domain offset is 5, the first time unit is n-5, then in the feedback time slot n Among the time units {time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-3, time slot n-2} included in the corresponding time unit group, the first time unit includes: time slot n-2 and time slot Slot n-5, the second time unit includes: time slot n-3 and time slot n-6.
在一些实施例中,对于第一时间单元,一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为第一反馈比特数Y。对于第二时间单元,一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为第二反馈比特数X。In some embodiments, for the first time unit, the number of feedback bits corresponding to one candidate physical channel receiver is the first number Y of feedback bits. For the second time unit, the number of feedback bits corresponding to one candidate physical channel receiver is the second number X of feedback bits.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
所述第一反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
所述第一反馈比特数根据码块组CBG反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the code block group CBG feedback length;
在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一反馈比特数为1。In a case where spatial domain bundling feedback is configured, the first number of feedback bits is 1.
可选地,所述第一反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:Optionally, the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
所述第一反馈比特数根据第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道时对应的TB反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the corresponding TB feedback length when scheduling a physical channel in the first control information format;
所述第一反馈比特数根据第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道时对应的CBG反馈长度确定。The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the corresponding CBG feedback length when a physical channel is scheduled in the first control information format.
可选地,第一设备未被配置CBG反馈或第一设备被配置TB反馈时,第一反馈比特数为TB反馈长度(即配置的最大TB个数)。可选地,该TB反馈长度为第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道时对应的TB反馈长度。Optionally, when the first device is not configured with CBG feedback or the first device is configured with TB feedback, the first number of feedback bits is the TB feedback length (that is, the configured maximum number of TBs). Optionally, the TB feedback length is the corresponding TB feedback length when the first control information format schedules a physical channel.
例如,第一设备接收对应第一控制信息格式的第一控制信息调度一个物理信道时对应的最大TB个数为2,则第一反馈比特数为2。For example, when the first device receives the first control information corresponding to the first control information format and schedules a physical channel, the corresponding maximum number of TBs is 2, and the first number of feedback bits is 2.
可选地,第一设备被配置CBG反馈时,第一反馈比特数为TB反馈长度*CBG反馈长度(即配置的最大TB个数*配置的最大CBG个数)。可选地,该TB反馈长度为第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道时对应的TB反馈长度,该CBG反馈长度为第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道时对应的CBG反馈长度。Optionally, when the first device is configured with CBG feedback, the first number of feedback bits is TB feedback length*CBG feedback length (that is, the configured maximum number of TBs*the configured maximum number of CBGs). Optionally, the TB feedback length is the corresponding TB feedback length when the first control information format schedules a physical channel, and the CBG feedback length is the corresponding CBG feedback length when the first control information format schedules a physical channel.
例如,第一设备接收对应第一控制信息格式的第一控制信息调度一个物理信道时对应的最大TB个数为2,最大CBG个数为4,则第一反馈比特数为8。For example, when the first device receives the first control information corresponding to the first control information format to schedule a physical channel, the corresponding maximum number of TBs is 2, the maximum number of CBGs is 4, and the first number of feedback bits is 8.
在一些实施例中,所述第二反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:In some embodiments, the second number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
所述第二反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The second number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
所述第二反馈比特数为1;The second feedback bit number is 1;
在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1;In the case of configured airspace bundling feedback, the second feedback bit number is 1;
在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1。In a case where time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the second number of feedback bits is 1.
可选地,所述第二反馈比特数根据第一控制信息格式调度多个物理信道时每个物理信道对应的TB反馈长度确定。Optionally, the second number of feedback bits is determined according to the TB feedback length corresponding to each physical channel when the first control information format schedules multiple physical channels.
本申请实施例中,空域绑定反馈可理解为两个码字的HARQ-ACK信息绑定,只有两个码字对应的HARQ-ACK信息均为ACK,则两个码字绑定后的待反馈信息为ACK;如果两个码字中的任意一个码字的HARQ-ACK信息为NACK,则两个码字绑定后的待反馈信息为NACK。如果只调度了1 个码字,对于未被调度的另一个码字,假设其对应的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK。In the embodiment of the present application, the spatial domain bundling feedback can be understood as the bundling of HARQ-ACK information of two codewords. Only the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the two codewords is ACK, and the waiting The feedback information is ACK; if the HARQ-ACK information of any one of the two codewords is NACK, the information to be fed back after the two codewords are bundled is NACK. If only one codeword is scheduled, for another unscheduled codeword, it is assumed that its corresponding HARQ-ACK information is ACK.
本申请实施例中,时域绑定反馈可理解为N个候选物理信道接收机会的HARQ-ACK信息绑定,只有N个候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息均为ACK,则该N个候选物理信道接收机会绑定后的待反馈信息为ACK;如果N个候选物理信道接收机会中的任意一个候选物理信道接收机会的HARQ-ACK信息为NACK,则N个候选物理信道接收机会绑定后的待反馈信息为NACK。N为大于或等于2的正整数。In the embodiment of the present application, the time-domain bundling feedback can be understood as the HARQ-ACK information bundling of N candidate physical channel receivers, and only the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the N candidate physical channel receivers is ACK, then the N The information to be fed back after the bundling of candidate physical channel receivers is ACK; if the HARQ-ACK information of any one of the N candidate physical channel receivers is NACK, the N candidate physical channel receivers are bound The determined feedback information is NACK. N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
可选地,第一设备被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,进行空域绑定反馈。Optionally, when the first device is configured with airspace binding feedback, perform airspace binding feedback.
可选地,第一设备被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,进行时域绑定反馈。Optionally, when the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, it performs time-domain bundling feedback.
可选地,对于被调度物理信道接收的候选物理信道接收机会,该候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息为对应的物理信道接收后的译码信息。Optionally, for a candidate physical channel receiver that is scheduled for physical channel reception, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver is decoding information after the corresponding physical channel is received.
可选地,对于未被调度物理信道接收的候选物理信道接收机会,该候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK。Optionally, for a candidate physical channel receiver that is not received by the scheduled physical channel, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver is ACK.
可选地,N是预定义的,或N是根据网络设备的配置参数例如时域绑定反馈参数确定的。Optionally, N is predefined, or N is determined according to configuration parameters of network devices such as time domain bonding feedback parameters.
可选地,该N个候选物理信道接收机会对应一个第一控制信息格式调度的候选物理信道接收机会。Optionally, the N candidate physical channel receivers correspond to one candidate physical channel receiver scheduled by the first control information format.
可选地,该N个候选物理信道接收机会为第一时间单元组包括的候选物理信道接收机会中连续的N个候选物理信道接收机会。Optionally, the N candidate physical channel receiver opportunities are consecutive N candidate physical channel receiver opportunities among the candidate physical channel receiver opportunities included in the first time unit group.
可选地,如果N个候选物理信道接收机会的HARQ-ACK信息绑定后反馈,该待反馈信息在第一HARQ-ACK码本中的位置为该N个候选物理信道接收机会中的至少一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈信息在第一HARQ-ACK码本中的位置。Optionally, if the HARQ-ACK information of N candidate physical channel receivers is bundled and fed back, the position of the information to be fed back in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is at least one of the N candidate physical channel receivers The position of the feedback information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver in the first HARQ-ACK codebook.
可选地,如果N个候选物理信道接收机会的HARQ-ACK信息绑定后反馈,该待反馈信息在第一HARQ-ACK码本中的位置为该N个候选物理信道接收机会中的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈信息在第一HARQ-ACK码本中的位置。进一步可选地,该待反馈信息在第一HARQ-ACK码本中的位置为该N个候选物理信道接收机会中的最后一个或第一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈信息在第一HARQ-ACK码本中的位置。Optionally, if the HARQ-ACK information of N candidate physical channel receivers is bundled and fed back, the position of the information to be fed back in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is one of the N candidate physical channel receivers The position of the feedback information corresponding to the physical channel receiver in the first HARQ-ACK codebook. Further optionally, the position of the information to be fed back in the first HARQ-ACK codebook is the feedback information corresponding to the last or first candidate physical channel receiver among the N candidate physical channel receivers in the first HARQ-ACK codebook. - position in the ACK codebook.
第二反馈比特数是一个第二候选物理信道接收机会对应的比特数。可选地,一个第二候选物理信道接收机会对应的比特数为1,则第二反馈比特数为1。The second feedback bit number is a bit number corresponding to a second candidate physical channel receiver. Optionally, the number of bits corresponding to a second candidate physical channel receiver is 1, and the second feedback bit number is 1.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits are different.
在一示例中,第一反馈比特数为2,第二反馈比特数为1。在又一示例中,第一反馈比特数为1,第二反馈比特数为2。本申请实施例中,对第一反馈比特数和第二反馈比特数的大小可不进行任何限定。In an example, the first feedback bit number is 2, and the second feedback bit number is 1. In yet another example, the first feedback bit number is 1, and the second feedback bit number is 2. In this embodiment of the present application, there may be no limitation on the sizes of the first feedback bit number and the second feedback bit number.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数大于或等于所述第二反馈比特数。In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits is greater than or equal to the second number of feedback bits.
在一示例中,第一反馈比特数为2,第二反馈比特数为1。在又一示例中,第一反馈比特数为4,第二反馈比特数为1。In an example, the first feedback bit number is 2, and the second feedback bit number is 1. In yet another example, the first feedback bit number is 4, and the second feedback bit number is 1.
此时,当一时间单元上包括第一候选物理信道接收机会和第二候选物理信道接收机会,则该时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会的反馈比特数为第一反馈比特数。At this time, when a time unit includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the feedback bit number of a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity in the time unit is the first feedback bit number.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据以下至少之一确定的:In some embodiments, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one of the following:
因素1、HARQ反馈时序集合; Factor 1, HARQ feedback timing set;
因素2、时域资源分配TDRA表格; Factor 2, time domain resource allocation TDRA table;
因素3、TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV,其中,一个SLIV对应一个候选物理信道接收机会。 Factor 3. At least one line of symbol start length in the TDRA table indicates SLIV, wherein one SLIV corresponds to one candidate physical channel receiving opportunity.
在一示例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据HARQ反馈时序集合确定。In an example, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set.
在一示例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据TDRA表格确定。In an example, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to a TDRA table.
在一示例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据HARQ反馈时序集合、TDRA确定的。In an example, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, TDRA.
在一示例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的。In an example, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one row of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table.
对于因素1,HARQ反馈时序集合中包括至少一个HARQ反馈时序指示信息。For factor 1, the HARQ feedback timing set includes at least one piece of HARQ feedback timing indication information.
对于因素2,TDRA表格包括至少一行SLIV行,其中,一行SLIV行包括的SLIV的数量小于或等于M。For factor 2, the TDRA table includes at least one SLIV row, wherein the number of SLIVs included in one SLIV row is less than or equal to M.
对于因素2,TDRA表格包括指示同一个DCI调度的不同候选物理信道接收机会之间的间隔的时域偏移量的指示信息。可选地,该指示信息指示DCI与其调度的候选物理信道接收机会之间的时域偏移量。可选地,该指示信息指示同一个DCI调度的第一个候选物理信道接收机会和各候选物理信道接收机会之间的时域偏移量。For factor 2, the TDRA table includes indication information indicating the time domain offset of the interval between receiving opportunities of different candidate physical channels scheduled by the same DCI. Optionally, the indication information indicates a time domain offset between the DCI and its scheduled candidate physical channel receiving opportunity. Optionally, the indication information indicates the time domain offset between the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity scheduled by the same DCI.
以根据因素1和因素2确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元,即所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据HARQ反馈时序集合、TDRA表格确定的为例,根据TDRA确定第一反馈时间单元针对的候选物理信道接收机会,根据HARQ反馈时序集合确定同一个DCI调度的多个候选物理信道接收机会中的最后一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的时间单元与第一反馈时间单元之间的时间间隔,从而确定第一时间单元组中所包括的时间单元。Taking the determination of the time unit in the first time unit group according to factor 1 and factor 2, that is, the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set and the TDRA table as an example, the first feedback is determined according to TDRA The time unit for the candidate physical channel receiving opportunity, according to the HARQ feedback timing set, determines the time between the time unit corresponding to the last candidate physical channel receiving opportunity among the multiple candidate physical channel receiving opportunities scheduled by the same DCI and the first feedback time unit time interval, so as to determine the time units included in the first time unit group.
在一示例中,如图7所示,TDRA表格包括两行SLIV,第一行SLIV包括:SLIV1-1和SLIV1-2,对应连续时隙调度,第二行SLIV包括:SLIV2-1,HARQ反馈时序集合中包括{2,5},则第一时间单元组中的时间单元包括:时隙n-6、时隙n-5、时隙n-3和时隙n-2。In one example, as shown in FIG. 7, the TDRA table includes two rows of SLIV, the first row of SLIV includes: SLIV1-1 and SLIV1-2, corresponding to continuous slot scheduling, and the second row of SLIV includes: SLIV2-1, HARQ feedback The time series set includes {2, 5}, then the time units in the first time unit group include: time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-3 and time slot n-2.
在一示例中,如图8所示,TDRA表格包括两行SLIV,第一行SLIV包括:SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3和SLIV1-4,对应连续时隙调度,第二行SLIV包括:SLIV2-1,HARQ反馈时序集合中包括{2,4},则第一时间单元组中的时间单元包括:时隙n-7、时隙n-6、时隙n-5、时隙n-4、时隙n-3和时隙n-2。In one example, as shown in Figure 8, the TDRA table includes two rows of SLIV, the first row of SLIV includes: SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3 and SLIV1-4, corresponding to continuous slot scheduling, the second row of SLIV Including: SLIV2-1, the HARQ feedback timing set includes {2, 4}, then the time units in the first time unit group include: time slot n-7, time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-4, slot n-3, and slot n-2.
在一示例中,如图9所示,TDRA表格包括两行SLIV,第一行SLIV包括:SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3、SLIV1-4,且SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3之间不连续,各SLIV对应的第二时域偏移量(例如以k0表示)为0、1、3、4,其中,k0为同一第一控制信息格式调度的第一个候选物理信道接收机会与各候选物理信道接收机会之间的时域偏移量,第二行SLIV包括:SLIV2-1,HARQ反馈时序集合中包括{2,4},则第一时间单元组中的时间单元包括:时隙n-8、时隙n-7、时隙n-6、时隙n-5、时隙n-4、时隙n-3和时隙n-2。In one example, as shown in FIG. 9, the TDRA table includes two rows of SLIV, the first row of SLIV includes: SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4, and between SLIV1-2 and SLIV1-3 discontinuous, the second time-domain offsets (for example, represented by k0) corresponding to each SLIV are 0, 1, 3, 4, where k0 is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity scheduled by the same first control information format and The time domain offset between each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, the second row of SLIV includes: SLIV2-1, the HARQ feedback timing set includes {2, 4}, then the time units in the first time unit group include: time Slot n-8, slot n-7, slot n-6, slot n-5, slot n-4, slot n-3, and slot n-2.
以根据因素1确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元为例,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合确定的,包括:Taking determining the time unit in the first time unit group according to factor 1 as an example, the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元与所述第一反馈时间单元之间的第一时域偏移量是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set, where , the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
这里,第一时间单元与第一反馈时间单元之间的时域偏移量为第一时域偏移量k1。k1是HARQ反馈时序集合中的配置的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的。在图7所示的示例中,HARQ反馈时序集合中的配置的HARQ反馈时序指示信息包括2和5,则k1的取值包括2和5。Here, the time domain offset between the first time unit and the first feedback time unit is the first time domain offset k1. k1 is determined by the configured HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set. In the example shown in FIG. 7 , the configured HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set includes 2 and 5, and the value of k1 includes 2 and 5.
可选地,HARQ反馈时序集合中可以配置一个或多个HARQ反馈时序指示信息。Optionally, one or more pieces of HARQ feedback timing indication information may be configured in the HARQ feedback timing set.
这里,第一时间单元为TDRA表格第一SLIV行中最后一个SLIV对应的时间单元。在图7所示的示例中,第一SLIV包括SLIV1-2和SLIV2-1,第一时间单元包括:时隙n-5和时隙n-2,即时隙n-5对应SLIV1-2和SLIV2-1,时隙n-2对应SLIV1-2和SLIV2-1。其中,第一SLIV行指的是TDRA表格中的任意一行。Here, the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the last SLIV in the first SLIV row of the TDRA table. In the example shown in Figure 7, the first SLIV includes SLIV1-2 and SLIV2-1, and the first time unit includes: time slot n-5 and time slot n-2, that is, slot n-5 corresponds to SLIV1-2 and SLIV2 -1, time slot n-2 corresponds to SLIV1-2 and SLIV2-1. Wherein, the first SLIV row refers to any row in the TDRA table.
以根据因素3确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元为例,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:Taking determining the time unit in the first time unit group according to factor 3 as an example, the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;和/或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; and/or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV。The second time unit in the first time unit group is a time unit corresponding to a second SLIV, and the second SLIV is a time unit other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV.
TDRA表格中每一SLIV行包括至少一个SLIV,在一SLIV行对应一个SLIV的情况下,该SLIV行仅包括第一SLIV。在一SLIV行对应多个SLIV的情况下,该SLIV行包括第一SLIV和第二SLIV。第一SLIV对应的时间单元为第一时间单元,第二SLIV对应的时间单元为第二时间单元。Each SLIV row in the TDRA table includes at least one SLIV, and in the case that one SLIV row corresponds to one SLIV, the SLIV row only includes the first SLIV. In the case that one SLIV line corresponds to multiple SLIVs, the SLIV line includes the first SLIV and the second SLIV. The time unit corresponding to the first SLIV is the first time unit, and the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV is the second time unit.
在一示例中,在图7所示,SLIV1行包括的第一SLIV为SLIV1-2,SLIV2行包括的第二SLIV为SLIV1-1,SLIV2行包括的第一SLIV为SLIV2-1,则SLIV1-2和SLIV2-1对应的时间单元为第一时间单元,SLIV1-1对应的时间单元为第二时间单元。In one example, as shown in FIG. 7, the first SLIV included in the SLIV1 row is SLIV1-2, the second SLIV included in the SLIV2 row is SLIV1-1, and the first SLIV included in the SLIV2 row is SLIV2-1, then SLIV1- 2 The time unit corresponding to SLIV2-1 is the first time unit, and the time unit corresponding to SLIV1-1 is the second time unit.
在一示例中,在图8所示,SLIV1行包括的第一SLIV为SLIV1-4,SLIV1行包括的第二SLIV为SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3,SLIV2行包括的第一SLIV为SLIV2-1,则SLIV1-4和SLIV2-1对应的时间单元为第一时间单元,SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3对应的时间单元为第二时间单元。In one example, as shown in FIG. 8, the first SLIV included in the SLIV1 row is SLIV1-4, the second SLIV included in the SLIV1 row is SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, and SLIV1-3, and the first SLIV included in the SLIV2 row is SLIV2-1, the time units corresponding to SLIV1-4 and SLIV2-1 are the first time unit, and the time units corresponding to SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, and SLIV1-3 are the second time unit.
以根据因素3确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元为例,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:Taking the determination of the time units in the first time unit group according to factor 3 as an example, in the case where time domain binding feedback is configured, the time units in the first time unit group are based on at least one row in the TDRA table The symbol start length indicates what SLIV determines, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The second time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the last one in the first SLIV group in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain bonding feedback parameters.
可选地,在被配置时域绑定的情况下,第一SLIV行中的多个SLIV对应一个组,可将第一SLIV行对应的多个候选物理信道接收机会进行绑定,将一个SLIV行对应的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息绑定为一个待反馈的HARQ-ACK信息,此时,待反馈的HARQ-ACK信息对应HARQ-ACK码本中第一时间单元,第一时间单元为第一SLIV行中最后一个SLIV对应的时间单元。Optionally, when time domain binding is configured, multiple SLIVs in the first SLIV row correspond to a group, multiple candidate physical channel receivers corresponding to the first SLIV row can be bound, and one SLIV The HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the row is bundled into one HARQ-ACK information to be fed back. At this time, the HARQ-ACK information to be fed back corresponds to the first time unit in the HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first The time unit is the time unit corresponding to the last SLIV in the first SLIV row.
可选地,时域绑定反馈参数包括N,N大于1。Optionally, the time-domain bundling feedback parameter includes N, and N is greater than 1.
在一示例中,将第一SLIV行对应的多个候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息绑定为1比特。In an example, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to multiple candidate physical channel receivers corresponding to the first SLIV row is bundled into 1 bit.
在一示例中,TDRA表格中包括两行SLIV,其中一行SLIV中包括3个SLIV:SLIV1~SLIV 3,则该行SLIV对应的SLIV组包括SLIV1~3,第一时间单元包括SLIV3对应的时间单元;另一行SLIV中包括5个SLIV:SLIV4~SLIV 8,则该行SLIV对应的SLIV组包括SLIV4~8,第一时间单元包括SLIV8对应的时间单元。In an example, the TDRA table includes two rows of SLIV, and one row of SLIV includes 3 SLIVs: SLIV1~SLIV 3, then the SLIV group corresponding to this row of SLIV includes SLIV1~3, and the first time unit includes the time unit corresponding to SLIV3 ; Another row of SLIVs includes 5 SLIVs: SLIV4-SLIV 8, then the SLIV group corresponding to this row of SLIVs includes SLIV4-8, and the first time unit includes the time unit corresponding to SLIV8.
可选地,在被配置时域绑定的情况下,第一SLIV行中的多个SLIV对应多个SLIV组,第一SLIV组为任一SLIV组,第一SLIV组中SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息绑定为一个待反馈的HARQ-ACK信息,此时,待反馈的HARQ-ACK信息对应HARQ-ACK码本中第二时间单元,第二时间单元为对应的第一SLIV组中最后一个SLIV对应的时间单元。应理解,在该情况下,该多个SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV对应的时间单元也可以认为是第一时间单元。Optionally, when time domain binding is configured, multiple SLIVs in the first SLIV row correspond to multiple SLIV groups, the first SLIV group is any SLIV group, and the candidate physical The HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the channel receiver is bound as one HARQ-ACK information to be fed back. At this time, the HARQ-ACK information to be fed back corresponds to the second time unit in the HARQ-ACK codebook, and the second time unit is the corresponding The time unit corresponding to the last SLIV in the first SLIV group. It should be understood that, in this case, the time unit corresponding to the last SLIV in the last SLIV group among the multiple SLIV groups may also be considered as the first time unit.
在一示例中,一行SLIV中包括8个SLIV:SLIV1~SLIV 8,根据时域绑定反馈参数确定为4个候选物理信道接收机会绑定,则该行SLIV中包括2组SLIV,分别为SLIV1~4,SLIV5~8,第二时间单元为SLIV4和SLIV8对应的时间单元。其中,SLIV8对应的时间单元也可以认为是第一时间单元。In one example, a row of SLIVs includes 8 SLIVs: SLIV1-SLIV 8, and according to the time-domain bonding feedback parameters, it is determined that 4 candidate physical channel receivers are likely to be bonded, then the row of SLIVs includes 2 groups of SLIVs, namely SLIV1 ~4, SLIV5~8, the second time unit is the time unit corresponding to SLIV4 and SLIV8. Wherein, the time unit corresponding to SLIV8 may also be considered as the first time unit.
以根据因素2确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元为例,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:Taking determining the time unit in the first time unit group according to factor 2 as an example, the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to the TDRA table, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元与第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量为第二时域偏移量,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The time domain offset between the second time unit in the first time unit group and the first time unit is a second time domain offset, and the second time domain offset is based on the TDRA table determined, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
这里,第一设备根据TDRA表格确定第二时域偏移量,根据确定的第二时域偏移量和第一时间单元确定第二时间单元。Here, the first device determines the second time domain offset according to the TDRA table, and determines the second time unit according to the determined second time domain offset and the first time unit.
在一些实施例中,所述第一SLIV行中包括至少两个SLIV,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the first SLIV row includes at least two SLIVs, and the second time domain offset is determined according to the TDRA table, including:
所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行对应的至少一个K0值确定的;或,The second time domain offset is determined according to at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
所述第二时域偏移量是所述TDRA表格中的第二SLIV对应的时间单元与所述第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV,或,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The second time domain offset is the time domain offset between the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV in the TDRA table and the first time unit, and the second SLIV is the time domain offset in the TDRA table The SLIV other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row of , or, in the case where time-domain binding feedback is configured, the second SLIV is the first SLIV in the TDRA table The last SLIV in the first SLIV group in the row, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to the time-domain binding feedback parameters.
可选地,第二时域偏移量为TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行对应的至少一个K0值。Optionally, the second time domain offset is at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
可选地,第二时域偏移量为TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中第一SLIV和第二SLIV之间的时域偏移量。Optionally, the second time domain offset is a time domain offset between the first SLIV and the second SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
在一些实施例中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV。In some embodiments, the SLIV is an effective SLIV.
在一些实施例中,有效SLIV可理解为该SLIV对应的符号中不包括上行符号。当SLIV对应的时间单元内该候选物理信道接收机会对应的符号中至少一个符号是上行符号,则认为该SLIV为无效SLIV。In some embodiments, a valid SLIV may be understood as the symbol corresponding to the SLIV does not include an uplink symbol. When at least one of the symbols corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity in the time unit corresponding to the SLIV is an uplink symbol, the SLIV is considered to be an invalid SLIV.
在一些实施例中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV,包括:In some embodiments, the SLIV is an effective SLIV comprising:
所述SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会为有效调度;或,The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is effectively scheduled; or,
所述第一设备可被调度根据所述SLIV进行物理信道接收。The first device may be scheduled to perform physical channel reception according to the SLIV.
这里,所述第一设备可根据SLIV调度的候选物理信道接收机会进行物理信道的接收,其中,在一个候选物理信道接收机会上存在传输物理信道的可能,即第一设备可在候选物理信道接收机会上接收到第一控制信息调度的物理信道。Here, the first device can receive the physical channel according to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity scheduled by SLIV, wherein there is a possibility of transmitting a physical channel on a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, that is, the first device can receive the physical channel on the candidate physical channel Opportunistically receive the physical channel scheduled by the first control information.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元与所述第一反馈时间单元之间的第一时域偏移量是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个有效SLIV。In some embodiments, the first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is based on the HARQ feedback timing in the HARQ feedback timing set Determined by the indication information, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last valid SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
作为示例,第一设备被一个第一控制信息调度物理信道接收,该第一控制信息指示TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行,该第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV对应时间单元n,倒数第二个SLIV对应时间单元n-1,该第一控制信息对应的HARQ反馈时序指示信息为K1,其中,该最后一个SLIV不是有效SLIV(或者说该SLIV为无效SLIV),该倒数第二个SLIV是有效SLIV,则该第一控制信息(或该第一控制信息调度的物理信道接收)对应的反馈时间单元为时间单元n-1+K1。As an example, the first device is received by a physical channel scheduled by a first control information, the first control information indicates the first SLIV row in the TDRA table, the last SLIV in the first SLIV row corresponds to time unit n, and the penultimate A SLIV corresponds to time unit n-1, and the HARQ feedback timing indication information corresponding to the first control information is K1, wherein, the last SLIV is not a valid SLIV (or the SLIV is an invalid SLIV), and the penultimate SLIV is If SLIV is valid, the feedback time unit corresponding to the first control information (or the physical channel reception scheduled by the first control information) is time unit n-1+K1.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元与所述第一反馈时间单元之间的第一时域偏移量是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个配置的SLIV。在该情况下,第一SLIV可以是有效SLIV,也可以不是有效SLIV。In some embodiments, the first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is based on the HARQ feedback timing in the HARQ feedback timing set determined by the indication information, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last configured SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table. In this case, the first SLIV may or may not be a valid SLIV.
作为示例,第一设备被一个第一控制信息调度物理信道接收,该第一控制信息指示TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行,该第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV对应时间单元n,倒数第二个SLIV对应时间单元n-1,该第一控制信息对应的HARQ反馈时序指示信息为K1,其中,该最后一个SLIV不是有效SLIV(或者说该SLIV为无效SLIV),该倒数第二个SLIV是有效SLIV,则该第一控制信息(或该第一控制信息调度的物理信道接收)对应的反馈时间单元为时间单元n+K1。As an example, the first device is received by a physical channel scheduled by a first control information, the first control information indicates the first SLIV row in the TDRA table, the last SLIV in the first SLIV row corresponds to time unit n, and the penultimate A SLIV corresponds to time unit n-1, and the HARQ feedback timing indication information corresponding to the first control information is K1, wherein, the last SLIV is not a valid SLIV (or the SLIV is an invalid SLIV), and the penultimate SLIV is If SLIV is valid, the feedback time unit corresponding to the first control information (or the physical channel reception scheduled by the first control information) is time unit n+K1.
在一些实施例中,第二设备向第一设备发送调度至少一个物理信道传输的第一控制信息,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述至少一个物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息。In some embodiments, the second device sends to the first device first control information for scheduling transmission of at least one physical channel, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the at least one physical channel.
所述第一设备收到的第一控制信息调度至少一个物理信道传输,所述第一控制信息对应所述第一控制信息格式,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述至少一个物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息。The first control information received by the first device schedules at least one physical channel for transmission, the first control information corresponds to the first control information format, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the at least one physical channel Corresponding HARQ-ACK information.
第二设备向第一设备发送第一控制信息,第一控制信息调度的物理信道的个数为S,其中,S小于或等于M。The second device sends first control information to the first device, and the number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information is S, where S is less than or equal to M.
可选地,第一控制信息可指示TDRA表格中的SLIV行,第一控制信息指示的SLIV行所调度的SLIV对应的物理信道为第一控制信息调度的物理信道。Optionally, the first control information may indicate the SLIV row in the TDRA table, and the physical channel corresponding to the SLIV scheduled by the SLIV row indicated by the first control information is the physical channel scheduled by the first control information.
在一示例中,M为4,TDRA表格如下:In an example, M is 4, and the TDRA table is as follows:
第1行:SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3、SLIV1-4;Line 1: SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4;
第2行:SLIV2-1、SLIV2-2;Line 2: SLIV2-1, SLIV2-2;
第3行:SLIV3-1;Row 3: SLIV3-1;
如果第二设备发送给第一设备的第一控制指示TDRA表格中的第1行,则S=4;如果第二设备发送给第一设备的第一控制信息指示TDRA表格中的第2行,则S=2;如果第二设备发送给第一设备的第一控制信息指示TDRA表格中的第3行,则S=1。If the first control information sent by the second device to the first device indicates row 1 in the TDRA table, then S=4; if the first control information sent by the second device to the first device indicates row 2 in the TDRA table, Then S=2; if the first control information sent by the second device to the first device indicates row 3 in the TDRA table, then S=1.
可选地,第一控制信息还包括HARQ反馈时序指示,HARQ反馈时序指示用于确定HARQ反馈时序集合中的取值。Optionally, the first control information further includes a HARQ feedback timing indication, and the HARQ feedback timing indication is used to determine a value in the HARQ feedback timing set.
可选地,在HARQ反馈时序集合包括一个值的情况下,第一控制信息可不包括HARQ反馈时序指示,此时,K1为HARQ反馈时序集合所包括的值。Optionally, when the HARQ feedback timing set includes a value, the first control information may not include the HARQ feedback timing indication, and at this time, K1 is the value included in the HARQ feedback timing set.
第二设备发送给第一设备的第一控制信息用于调度至少一个物理信道,第一设备反馈给第二设备的第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一控制信息调度的至少一个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息。The first control information sent by the second device to the first device is used to schedule at least one physical channel, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook fed back by the first device to the second device includes the HARQ codebook of at least one physical channel scheduled by the first control information. -ACK information.
在一示例中,第二设备发送给第一设备的第一控制信息用于调度物理信道1和物理信道2,第一设备反馈给第二设备的第一HARQ-ACK码本包括:物理信道1和物理信道2对应的HARQ-ACK信息。In an example, the first control information sent by the second device to the first device is used to schedule physical channel 1 and physical channel 2, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook fed back by the first device to the second device includes: physical channel 1 HARQ-ACK information corresponding to physical channel 2.
在一些实施例中,所述至少一个物理信道中的第一物理信道对应第一时间单元,其中,所述第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应第二反馈比特数X,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。In some embodiments, a first physical channel of the at least one physical channel corresponds to a first time unit, wherein a candidate physical channel receiver on the first time unit corresponds to a first feedback bit number Y, and the The first physical channel corresponds to the second number of feedback bits X, and the first number of feedback bits is different from the second number of feedback bits.
当第一时间单元对应的HARQ-ACK信息的比特数为第一反馈比特数,在第一反馈时间单元上对第 一物理信道进行反馈时,第一物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息的比特数为第二反馈比特数,此时,HARQ-ACK码本中为第一时间单元分配的比特数与第一时间单元实际需要的比特数不同。When the number of bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the first time unit is the first number of feedback bits, and the first physical channel is fed back in the first feedback time unit, the number of bits of the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the first physical channel is the second number of feedback bits. At this time, the number of bits allocated for the first time unit in the HARQ-ACK codebook is different from the number of bits actually required by the first time unit.
可选地,第一反馈比特数Y大于第二反馈比特数X。Optionally, the first number Y of feedback bits is greater than the second number X of feedback bits.
在一些实施例中,所述第二反馈比特数X小于所述第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应的X个HARQ-ACK信息比特位于所述Y个HARQ-ACK信息比特中的前X个HARQ-ACK信息比特。In some embodiments, the second feedback bit number X is smaller than the first feedback bit number Y, and the X HARQ-ACK information bits corresponding to the first physical channel are located in the Y HARQ-ACK information bits The first X HARQ-ACK information bits of .
这里,当一个时间单元需要反馈的HARQ-ACK信息的比特数小于为该时间单元分配的比特数,则反馈的HARQ-ACK信息占用分配的比特中部分的比特。Here, when the number of bits of the HARQ-ACK information to be fed back in a time unit is less than the number of bits allocated for the time unit, the fed back HARQ-ACK information occupies part of the allocated bits.
在一些实施例中,在被配置时域绑定反馈和空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一设备的绑定反馈方式为:先进行空域绑定,再进行时域绑定。In some embodiments, when time-domain bundling feedback and air-domain bundling feedback are configured, the bundling feedback mode of the first device is: perform space-domain bundling first, and then time-domain bundling.
在一些实施例中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,当所述第一设备被配置的传输块TB反馈长度大于1时,所述第一设备的绑定反馈方式为:先进行空域绑定,再进行时域绑定。In some embodiments, when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, when the configured transport block TB feedback length of the first device is greater than 1, the bundling feedback method of the first device is: first Binding in the air domain, followed by binding in the time domain.
也就是说,如果第一设备被配置了时域绑定反馈和空域绑定反馈,或第一设备被配置了时域绑定反馈但未被配置空域绑定反馈,当待绑定反馈的物理信道对应的TB反馈长度大于1(或者说待绑定反馈的物理信道对应的码字数大于1)时,第一设备需要先对每个物理信道的多个码字对应的HARQ-ACK信息进行空域绑定反馈后得到该物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息,再对不同的物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息进行时域绑定反馈。That is to say, if the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback and air-domain bundling feedback, or the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback but not configured with air-domain bundling feedback, when the physical When the TB feedback length corresponding to the channel is greater than 1 (or the number of codewords corresponding to the physical channel to be bundled and fed back is greater than 1), the first device needs to perform spatial domain After the bundling feedback, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the physical channel is obtained, and then the time-domain bundling feedback is performed on the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to different physical channels.
在一些实施例中,在所述第一设备被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本中的一个HARQ-ACK信息确定至少两个码字的HARQ-ACK信息。In some embodiments, when the first device is configured with spatial domain bundling feedback, the second device determines at least two codewords according to one piece of HARQ-ACK information in the first HARQ-ACK codebook HARQ-ACK information.
作为示例,第二设备确定第一设备被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,在接收到的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK的情况下,确定绑定的两个HARQ-ACK信息为ACK,在接收到的HARQ-ACK信息为NACK的情况下,假设绑定的两个HARQ-ACK信息均为NACK。As an example, when the second device determines that the first device is configured with spatial domain bundling feedback, if the received HARQ-ACK information is ACK, it determines that the two bundled HARQ-ACK information are ACK, and when the received In the case that the HARQ-ACK information of the given information is NACK, it is assumed that the two bundled HARQ-ACK information are both NACK.
在一些实施例中,在所述第一设备被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本中一个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息确定至少两个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息。In some embodiments, when the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the second device determines at least two HARQ-ACK information of physical channels.
作为示例,第二设备确定第一设备被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,在接收到的一个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK的情况下,确定所绑定的多个物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息均为ACK,在接收到的一个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息为NACK的情况下,确定绑定多个物理信道中一个或多个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息为NACK,相应地,第二设备可以假设绑定多个物理信道中的每个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息均为NACK。As an example, when the second device determines that the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, if the received HARQ-ACK information of one physical channel is ACK, determine the The HARQ-ACK information is all ACK. When the received HARQ-ACK information of a physical channel is NACK, it is determined that the HARQ-ACK information of one or more physical channels in multiple physical channels is bound to NACK, and accordingly , the second device may assume that the HARQ-ACK information of each physical channel bound to multiple physical channels is NACK.
在一些实施例中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一设备在进行时域绑定时假设未被调度的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK。In some embodiments, when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the first device assumes that HARQ-ACK information corresponding to unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers is ACK when performing time-domain bundling.
在所述第一设备被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备假设未被调度的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK。In a case where the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the second device assumes that HARQ-ACK information corresponding to unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers is ACK.
如果配置了N个物理信道绑定反馈,但调度的物理信道的个数小于N,对于未被调度的物理信道,假设其对应的反馈信息为ACK。If N physical channel bonding feedback is configured, but the number of scheduled physical channels is less than N, for the unscheduled physical channels, it is assumed that the corresponding feedback information is ACK.
在一些实施例中,所述第一设备为终端,所述第二设备为网络设备,所述物理信道包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括上行反馈资源;或,In some embodiments, the first device is a terminal, the second device is a network device, the physical channel includes a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include uplink feedback resources; or,
所述第一设备为第一终端,所述第二设备为第二终端,所述物理信道包括PSSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括侧行反馈资源。The first device is a first terminal, the second device is a second terminal, the physical channel includes a PSSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include sidelink feedback resources.
可选地,上行反馈资源包括PUCCH资源或物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH)资源。Optionally, the uplink feedback resources include PUCCH resources or physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) resources.
可选地,侧行反馈资源包括:物理侧链路反馈信道(Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel,PSFCH)资源。Optionally, the sidelink feedback resources include: Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel (Physical Sidelink Feedback Channel, PSFCH) resources.
在一些实施例中,所述第一设备被配置类型Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本反馈。In some embodiments, the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
下面,对本申请实施例提供的无线通信方法进行进一步说明。In the following, the wireless communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be further described.
本申请实施例考虑在网络设备可以使用一个控制信息例如DCI调度至少两个物理信道例如PDSCH 传输,或可以使用一个控制信息激活至少两个下行资源用于至少两个物理信道传输(其中,该至少两个下行资源可以属于相同的SPS资源配置,也可以属于不同的SPS资源配置)的情况下,半静态码本中的候选PDSCH接收机会的确定,以及终端设备根据确定对应的半静态码本,从而进行半静态码本反馈。The embodiment of this application considers that the network device can use one piece of control information such as DCI to schedule at least two physical channels such as PDSCH transmission, or can use one piece of control information to activate at least two downlink resources for at least two physical channel transmissions (wherein, the at least Two downlink resources may belong to the same SPS resource configuration, and may also belong to different SPS resource configurations), the determination of the candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities in the semi-static codebook, and the terminal device determines the corresponding semi-static codebook, Thus, semi-static codebook feedback is performed.
第一设备例如终端设备被配置第一控制信息格式,其中,所述第一控制信息格式可以调度的物理信道的最大个数或可以调度的物理信道对应的最大时隙个数M大于或等于2。The first device, such as a terminal device, is configured with a first control information format, where the maximum number of physical channels that can be scheduled in the first control information format or the maximum number of time slots M corresponding to physical channels that can be scheduled is greater than or equal to 2 .
所述第一设备接收第二设备发送的第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度S个物理信道传输,S大于或等于1且小于或等于M,所述S个物理信道中的至少一个物理信道对应第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本对应第一反馈资源。The first device receives the first control information format sent by the second device, the first control information format schedules transmission of S physical channels, S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to M, and the S physical channels are At least one physical channel corresponds to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook corresponds to the first feedback resource.
所述第一设备通过所述第一反馈资源发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本。The first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook by using the first feedback resource.
这里,第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式指的是第一设备可以去检测该第一控制信息格式;第一设备接收的第一控制信息格式指的是第一设备通过检测接收到的第一控制信息格式。M指的可以是第一控制信息格式最多可以调度的物理信道个数;S指的是当前收到的对应第一控制信息格式的第一控制信息调度的物理信道个数。Here, the first control information format configured on the first device means that the first device can detect the first control information format; the first control information format received by the first device means that the first device receives the first control information format through detection. - Control message format. M refers to the maximum number of physical channels that can be scheduled by the first control information format; S refers to the number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information corresponding to the first control information format currently received.
在一示例中,TDRA表格如下:In one example, the TDRA form is as follows:
第1行:SLIV1-1、SLIV1-2、SLIV1-3、SLIV1-4Row 1: SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4
第2行:SLIV2-1、SLIV2-2Row 2: SLIV2-1, SLIV2-2
第3行:SLIV3-1Row 3: SLIV3-1
则M为4。Then M is 4.
对于S,如果第一设备收到的DCI指示TDRA表格中的第1行,则S=4;如果第一设备收到的DCI指示TDRA表格中的第2行,则S=2;如果第一设备收到的DCI指示TDRA表格中的第3行,则S=1。For S, if the DCI received by the first device indicates the first row in the TDRA table, then S=4; if the DCI received by the first device indicates the second row in the TDRA table, then S=2; if the first The DCI received by the device indicates row 3 in the TDRA table, then S=1.
在一些实施例中,第一设备被配置Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本反馈。In some embodiments, the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
在一些实施例中,第一HARQ-ACK码本的大小是根据M值确定的。In some embodiments, the size of the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to the M value.
在一些实施例中,一个反馈时隙对应一个HARQ-ACK码本,一个HARQ-ACK码本对应一个HARQ-ACK反馈窗口内包括的一组候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息。或者说,第一反馈资源对应第一HARQ-ACK码本,第一HARQ-ACK码本对应HARQ-ACK反馈窗口内包括的一组候选PDSCH接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息。例如,一个PUCCH时隙对应一个HARQ-ACK码本。In some embodiments, one feedback slot corresponds to one HARQ-ACK codebook, and one HARQ-ACK codebook corresponds to HARQ-ACK information corresponding to a group of candidate physical channel receivers included in one HARQ-ACK feedback window. In other words, the first feedback resource corresponds to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook corresponds to HARQ-ACK information corresponding to a group of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities included in the HARQ-ACK feedback window. For example, one PUCCH slot corresponds to one HARQ-ACK codebook.
在一些实施例中,所述物理信道包括PDSCH,所述第一设备包括终端设备,所述第二设备包括网络设备,所述第一控制信息格式包括DCI格式。In some embodiments, the physical channel includes a PDSCH, the first device includes a terminal device, the second device includes a network device, and the first control information format includes a DCI format.
在一些实施例中,所述物理信道包括侧行物理信道,所述第一设备包括第一终端设备,所述第二设备包括第二终端设备或网络设备。可选地,所述第一控制信息格式包括侧行控制信息格式或DCI格式。In some embodiments, the physical channel includes a sidelink physical channel, the first device includes a first terminal device, and the second device includes a second terminal device or a network device. Optionally, the first control information format includes a sidelink control information format or a DCI format.
在一些实施例中,第一反馈资源包括上行资源。例如,第一反馈资源包括PUCCH资源或PUSCH资源。In some embodiments, the first feedback resources include uplink resources. For example, the first feedback resources include PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources.
在一些实施例中,第一反馈资源包括侧行资源。例如,第一反馈资源包括PSFCH资源。In some embodiments, the first feedback resources include sidewalk resources. For example, the first feedback resources include PSFCH resources.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈资源的时域位置是根据所述第一控制信息格式中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的,其中,该HARQ反馈时序指示信息用于指示HARQ反馈时序集合中的取值;或者,所述第一反馈资源的时域位置是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合确定的,其中,所述第一控制信息格式中不包括HARQ反馈时序指示信息,和/或,HARQ反馈时序集合中只包括一个值。其中,HARQ反馈时序集合是高层参数配置的,或HARQ反馈时序集合是预设的。In some embodiments, the time domain position of the first feedback resource is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the first control information format, where the HARQ feedback timing indication information is used to indicate the HARQ feedback timing set or, the time domain position of the first feedback resource is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, wherein the first control information format does not include HARQ feedback timing indication information, and/or, Only one value is included in the HARQ feedback timing set. Wherein, the HARQ feedback timing set is configured by a high layer parameter, or the HARQ feedback timing set is preset.
具体地,所述第一反馈资源的时域位置是根据K1确定的,其中,第一控制信息格式中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息指示HARQ反馈时序集合中包括的K1值,或者,HARQ反馈时序集合中只包括K1值且所述第一控制信息格式中不包括HARQ反馈时序指示信息。Specifically, the time domain position of the first feedback resource is determined according to K1, wherein the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the first control information format indicates the K1 value included in the HARQ feedback timing set, or the HARQ feedback timing set Only the K1 value is included in the first control information format and the HARQ feedback timing indication information is not included in the first control information format.
可选地,K1值用于指示:如果所述S个物理信道中的最后一个物理信道的结束位置在时隙n,则所述第一反馈资源位于时隙n+K1。Optionally, the K1 value is used to indicate: if the end position of the last physical channel among the S physical channels is at time slot n, the first feedback resource is located at time slot n+K1.
可选地,K1值用于指示:如果所述S个SLIV中的最后一个SLIV的结束位置在时隙n,则所述第一反馈资源位于时隙n+K1。Optionally, the K1 value is used to indicate: if the end position of the last SLIV among the S SLIVs is in time slot n, the first feedback resource is located in time slot n+K1.
可选地,该最后一个SLIV是TDRA表格中配置的SLIV,或,该最后一个SLIV是有效的SLIV。Optionally, the last SLIV is the SLIV configured in the TDRA table, or, the last SLIV is a valid SLIV.
在一些实施例中,一个反馈时隙对应的一组候选物理信道接收机会是根据M值、S值和K1值中的至少一项确定的。In some embodiments, a group of candidate physical channel receivers corresponding to a feedback time slot is determined according to at least one of the M value, the S value and the K1 value.
以候选物理信道接收机会为候选PDSCH接收机会为例,该组候选PDSCH接收机会是根据HARQ反馈时序集合中的K1值和TDRA表格确定的,其中,TDRA表格还用于确定M值和/或S值。Taking candidate physical channel receiver opportunities as candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities as an example, the group of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities is determined according to the K1 value in the HARQ feedback timing set and the TDRA table, wherein the TDRA table is also used to determine the M value and/or the S value.
在一些实施例中,一组候选PDSCH接收机会对应的下行时隙是根据TDRA表格、M值、S值和K1值中的至少一项确定的。In some embodiments, the downlink time slots corresponding to a group of candidate PDSCH receivers are determined according to at least one of the TDRA table, M value, S value and K1 value.
在一些实施例中,一个下行时隙对应的HARQ-ACK反馈比特数是根据该下行时隙中包括的候选PDSCH接收机会个数和一个候选PDSCH接收机会对应的最大反馈比特数中的至少一项确定的。In some embodiments, the number of HARQ-ACK feedback bits corresponding to a downlink time slot is based on at least one of the number of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities included in the downlink time slot and the maximum number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate PDSCH receiver opportunity definite.
在一些实施例中,一个下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会的个数是根据TDRA表格确定的。作为示例,TDRA表格包括N行,每行对应至少一个SLIV值。In some embodiments, the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot is determined according to the TDRA table. As an example, the TDRA table includes N rows, each row corresponding to at least one SLIV value.
在一些实施例中,一个下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会的个数是根据TDRA表格中的有效SLIV调度确定的。例如,如果TDRA表格中的某一行对应的某个SLIV值指示的PDSCH在关联该下行时隙时出现该PDSCH对应的符号中至少有一个是上行符号,则该SLIV值被认为对应无效调度。In some embodiments, the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot is determined according to the effective SLIV scheduling in the TDRA table. For example, if at least one of the symbols corresponding to the PDSCH indicated by a certain SLIV value indicated by a row in the TDRA table is an uplink symbol when associated with the downlink time slot, the SLIV value is considered to correspond to invalid scheduling.
可选地,一个下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会的个数是根据TDRA表格中的有效SLIV调度和K1确定的。Optionally, the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot is determined according to the effective SLIV scheduling and K1 in the TDRA table.
假设终端设备被配置的TDRA表格中包括2行,第1行为1个DCI调度4个候选PDSCH接收机会,对应SLIV分别为{SLIV1-1,SLIV1-2,SLIV1-3,SLIV1-4}且假设该4个候选PDSCH接收机会位于4个连续的时隙上,第2行为1个DCI调度1个候选PDSCH接收机会,对应SLIV为SLIV2-1。HARQ反馈时序集合中包括两个K1值,分别为{2,4},则反馈时隙n对应的HARQ-ACK反馈窗口(或者说反馈时隙n对应的下行时隙)如图8所示,包括:时隙n-7,时隙n-6,时隙n-5,时隙n-4,时隙n-3和时隙n-2。可选地,一个下行时隙对应的候选PDSCH接收机会的个数是根据TDRA表格中的有效SLIV调度、K1和K0确定的。可选地,K0包括一个DCI调度的第一个PDSCH和该DCI调度的各PDSCH之间的时域偏移量例如时隙间隔的指示,或者,K0包括一个DCI与该DCI调度的各PDSCH之间的时域偏移量例如时隙间隔的指示。Assume that the TDRA table configured by the terminal device includes 2 rows, the first row 1 DCI schedules 4 candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities, and the corresponding SLIVs are {SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4} and assume The 4 candidate PDSCH receivers are located in 4 consecutive time slots, the second row schedules 1 candidate PDSCH receiver with 1 DCI, and the corresponding SLIV is SLIV2-1. The HARQ feedback timing set includes two K1 values, which are {2, 4} respectively, and the HARQ-ACK feedback window corresponding to feedback time slot n (or the downlink time slot corresponding to feedback time slot n) is shown in Figure 8. Including: time slot n-7, time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-4, time slot n-3 and time slot n-2. Optionally, the number of candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities corresponding to one downlink time slot is determined according to the effective SLIV scheduling, K1 and K0 in the TDRA table. Optionally, K0 includes an indication of the time domain offset between the first PDSCH scheduled by a DCI and the PDSCHs scheduled by the DCI, such as a time slot interval, or, K0 includes the difference between a DCI and each PDSCH scheduled by the DCI An indication of the time-domain offset between slots, such as slot spacing.
假设终端设备被配置的TDRA表格中包括2行,第1行为1个DCI调度4个候选PDSCH接收机会,对应SLIV分别为{SLIV1-1,SLIV1-2,SLIV1-3,SLIV1-4}且假设该4个候选PDSCH接收机会在时域上位于不连续的时隙(例如对应的K0值分别为0、1、3、4,表示一个DCI调度的第一个PDSCH和该DCI调度的各PDSCH之间的时隙间隔),第2行为1个DCI调度1个候选PDSCH接收机会,对应SLIV为SLIV2-1。HARQ反馈时序集合中包括两个K1值,分别为{2,4},则反馈时隙n对应的HARQ-ACK反馈窗口(或者说反馈时隙n对应的下行时隙)如图9所示,包括时隙n-8、时隙n-7、时隙n-6、时隙n-5、时隙n-4、时隙n-3和时隙n-2。Assume that the TDRA table configured by the terminal device includes 2 rows, the first row 1 DCI schedules 4 candidate PDSCH receiving opportunities, and the corresponding SLIVs are {SLIV1-1, SLIV1-2, SLIV1-3, SLIV1-4} and assume The four candidate PDSCH receivers are located in discontinuous time slots in the time domain (for example, the corresponding K0 values are 0, 1, 3, and 4 respectively, indicating that the first PDSCH scheduled by a DCI and each PDSCH scheduled by the DCI interval between slots), the second row schedules one candidate PDSCH receiving opportunity for one DCI, and the corresponding SLIV is SLIV2-1. The HARQ feedback timing set includes two K1 values, which are {2, 4} respectively, then the HARQ-ACK feedback window corresponding to feedback slot n (or the downlink slot corresponding to feedback slot n) is shown in Figure 9. It includes time slot n-8, time slot n-7, time slot n-6, time slot n-5, time slot n-4, time slot n-3 and time slot n-2.
本申请实施例中,一个下行时隙对应的HARQ-ACK反馈比特数的确定涉及以下两种情况:In the embodiment of the present application, the determination of the number of HARQ-ACK feedback bits corresponding to a downlink time slot involves the following two situations:
情况1、终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道接收情况下的每个候选物理信道机会对应的比特数X与一个DCI调度一个物理信道情况下候选物理信道接收机会对应的比特数Y不同。其中,X小于或等于Y。Case 1: The number of bits X corresponding to each candidate physical channel opportunity when the terminal device is configured to receive multiple physical channels scheduled by one DCI is different from the bit number Y corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity when one DCI schedules one physical channel. where X is less than or equal to Y.
例如,终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道情况下的每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的最大TB数或最大比特数为1,一个DCI调度一个物理信道情况下该候选物理信道接收机会对应的最大TB数或最大比特数为2,则X=1,Y=2。For example, when a terminal device is configured with one DCI scheduling multiple physical channels, the maximum number of TB or the maximum number of bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver is 1. In the case of one DCI scheduling one physical channel, the candidate physical channel receiver corresponds to The maximum number of TB or the maximum number of bits is 2, then X=1, Y=2.
又例如,终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道情况下的每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的最大TB数或最大比特数为1,一个DCI调度一个物理信道情况下该候选物理信道接收机会对应的最大TB数或最大比特数为2,且该终端设备被配置空域绑定反馈(或称为码字绑定反馈),则X=1,Y=1。For another example, when the terminal device is configured with one DCI scheduling multiple physical channels, the maximum number of TB or the maximum number of bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver opportunity is 1, and the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity in the case of one DCI scheduling one physical channel The corresponding maximum number of TBs or maximum number of bits is 2, and the terminal device is configured with airspace bundling feedback (or called codeword bundling feedback), then X=1, Y=1.
又例如,终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道情况下的每个候选物理信道接收机会按TB反馈且每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的最大TB数或最大比特数为1,一个DCI调度一个物理信道情况下该候选物理信道接收机会按CBG反馈且CBG反馈长度为4,对应的最大TB数为1,则X=1,Y=4。For another example, when the terminal device is configured with one DCI to schedule multiple physical channels, each candidate physical channel receiver will feed back in TB and the maximum number of TB or the maximum number of bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver is 1. One DCI scheduler In the case of one physical channel, the receiver of the candidate physical channel will give feedback according to CBG and the CBG feedback length is 4, and the corresponding maximum TB number is 1, then X=1, Y=4.
相应地,以图8为例,在时隙n上的PUCCH上待反馈的HARQ-ACK码本中每个下行时隙对应的比特数如表5所示,Correspondingly, taking Figure 8 as an example, the number of bits corresponding to each downlink slot in the HARQ-ACK codebook to be fed back on the PUCCH on slot n is shown in Table 5,
表5、HARQ-ACK码本中各下行时隙对应的比特数示例Table 5. Example of the number of bits corresponding to each downlink time slot in the HARQ-ACK codebook
下行时隙号downlink slot number n-7n-7 n-6n-6 n-5n-5 n-4n-4 n-3n-3 n-2n-2
比特数number of bits Xx Xx Xx YY Xx YY
可选地,如果在时隙n-4或时隙n-2上待反馈的比特数为X,例如待反馈一个DCI调度多个物理信道情况下某个物理信道的对应的X个比特,则该X个比特占用该Y个比特位置中的前X个比特的位置。Optionally, if the number of bits to be fed back on time slot n-4 or time slot n-2 is X, for example, the corresponding X bits of a certain physical channel in the case of one DCI scheduling multiple physical channels to be fed back, then The X bits occupy the first X bit positions among the Y bit positions.
作为示例,假设X=1,Y=2,则在时隙n上的PUCCH上待反馈的HARQ-ACK码本中每个下行时隙对应的比特数如表6所示:As an example, assuming X=1, Y=2, the number of bits corresponding to each downlink slot in the HARQ-ACK codebook to be fed back on the PUCCH on slot n is shown in Table 6:
表6、HARQ-ACK码本中各下行时隙对应的比特数示例Table 6. Example of the number of bits corresponding to each downlink time slot in the HARQ-ACK codebook
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000003
其中,对于时隙n-4,当第一设备被调度4个SLIV且对应K1=4时,HARQ-ACK码本中时隙n-4对应的反馈位置上反馈{SLIV1-4对应的HARQ-ACK信息,NACK};当第一设备被调度4个SLIV且对应K1=2时,HARQ-ACK码本中时隙n-4对应的反馈位置上反馈{SLIV1-2对应的HARQ-ACK信息,NACK};当第一设备被调度1个SLIV且对应K1=4时,HARQ-ACK码本中时隙n-4对应的反馈位置上反馈{SLIV2-1对应的HARQ-ACK信息中的第1比特,SLIV2-1对应的HARQ-ACK信息中的第2比特}。Wherein, for time slot n-4, when the first device is scheduled with 4 SLIVs and corresponds to K1=4, the feedback position corresponding to time slot n-4 in the HARQ-ACK codebook feeds back the HARQ- ACK information, NACK}; when the first device is scheduled with 4 SLIVs and corresponds to K1=2, the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to {SLIV1-2 is fed back at the feedback position corresponding to time slot n-4 in the HARQ-ACK codebook, NACK}; when the first device is scheduled with 1 SLIV and corresponds to K1=4, the feedback position corresponding to time slot n-4 in the HARQ-ACK codebook is fed back {the first in the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to SLIV2-1 bit, the second bit in the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to SLIV2-1}.
情况2:终端设备被配置时域绑定反馈,或者终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道时对应的比特数Z,或者终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道时多个候选物理信道接收机会中的至少两个候选物理信道接收机会绑定反馈。Case 2: The terminal device is configured with time-domain binding feedback, or the terminal device is configured with the corresponding bit number Z when one DCI schedules multiple physical channels, or the terminal device is configured with one DCI to schedule multiple physical channels with multiple candidate physical channels At least two candidate physical channel receivers among the receivers combine feedback.
在一些实施例中,如果终端设备被配置了空域绑定反馈且被配置了时域绑定反馈,则终端设备先进行空域绑定,再进行时域绑定。In some embodiments, if the terminal device is configured with air domain bundling feedback and configured with time domain bundling feedback, the terminal device performs air domain bundling first and then time domain bundling.
在一些实施例中,如果终端设备待反馈的一个物理信道对应的反馈比特数大于1,且该终端设备被配置了时域绑定反馈,则终端设备先进行一个物理信道对应的反馈比特数的绑定,再进行时域绑定。In some embodiments, if the number of feedback bits corresponding to a physical channel to be fed back by the terminal device is greater than 1, and the terminal device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the terminal device first performs the feedback bit number corresponding to a physical channel Binding, and then time domain binding.
在一些实施例中,时域绑定反馈可以是网络设备配置的,或者,时域绑定反馈可以是预定义的。In some embodiments, the time-domain bundling feedback may be configured by the network device, or the time-domain bundling feedback may be predefined.
在一些实施例中,终端设备被配置至少一个候选物理信道接收机会组,其中,每个候选物理信道接收机会组对应1个反馈比特。可选地,每个候选物理信道接收机会组对应的反馈比特在HARQ-ACK码本中的位置为该候选物理信道接收机会组中的最后一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特在HARQ-ACK码本中的位置。In some embodiments, the terminal device is configured with at least one candidate physical channel receiver set, where each candidate physical channel receiver set corresponds to 1 feedback bit. Optionally, the position of the feedback bit corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver group in the HARQ-ACK codebook is the feedback bit corresponding to the last candidate physical channel receiver in the candidate physical channel receiver group in the HARQ-ACK position in the codebook.
在一些实施例中,终端设备被配置至少一个SLIV组,其中,每个SLIV组对应1个反馈比特。可选地,每个SLIV组对应的反馈比特在HARQ-ACK码本中的位置为该SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV对应的反馈比特在HARQ-ACK码本中的位置。可选地,该最后一个SLIV是TDRA表格中配置的SLIV,或,该最后一个SLIV是有效SLIV。In some embodiments, the terminal device is configured with at least one SLIV group, where each SLIV group corresponds to 1 feedback bit. Optionally, the position of the feedback bit corresponding to each SLIV group in the HARQ-ACK codebook is the position of the feedback bit corresponding to the last SLIV in the SLIV group in the HARQ-ACK codebook. Optionally, the last SLIV is the SLIV configured in the TDRA table, or, the last SLIV is a valid SLIV.
同样以图8作为示例,假设终端设备被配置一个DCI对应的候选物理信道接收机会对应1个反馈比特,则在时隙n上的PUCCH上待反馈的HARQ-ACK码本中每个下行时隙对应的比特数如表7所示:Also taking Figure 8 as an example, assuming that the terminal device is configured with a DCI corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver corresponding to 1 feedback bit, then each downlink time slot in the HARQ-ACK codebook to be fed back on the PUCCH on time slot n The corresponding number of bits is shown in Table 7:
表7、HARQ-ACK码本中各下行时隙对应的比特数示例Table 7. Example of the number of bits corresponding to each downlink time slot in the HARQ-ACK codebook
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000004
其中,SLIV1-1至SLIV1-4绑定后的比特对应时域绑定,SLIV2-1不对应绑定,SLIV2-1绑定后的比特对应空域绑定。Wherein, the bound bits of SLIV1-1 to SLIV1-4 correspond to time domain binding, SLIV2-1 does not correspond to binding, and the bound bits of SLIV2-1 correspond to air domain binding.
也就是说,在该示例中,反馈时隙n对应的时隙组中只包括时隙n-4和时隙n-2,该HARQ-ACK码本中只包括2个比特,可以降低开销。That is to say, in this example, the slot group corresponding to the feedback slot n only includes slot n-4 and slot n-2, and the HARQ-ACK codebook only includes 2 bits, which can reduce overhead.
作为示例,假设终端设备被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道时每2个候选物理信道接收机会对应1个反馈比特,则在时隙n上的PUCCH上待反馈的HARQ-ACK码本中每个下行时隙对应的比特数如表8所示:As an example, assuming that a terminal device is configured with one DCI to schedule multiple physical channels, every two candidate physical channel receivers correspond to one feedback bit, then each of the HARQ-ACK codebooks to be fed back on the PUCCH on slot n The number of bits corresponding to the downlink time slot is shown in Table 8:
表8、HARQ-ACK码本中各下行时隙对应的比特数示例Table 8. Example of the number of bits corresponding to each downlink time slot in the HARQ-ACK codebook
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2021111350-appb-000006
其中,SLIV1-1和SLIV1-2绑定后的比特对应时域绑定,SLIV1-3和SLIV1-4绑定后的比特对应时域绑定,SLIV2-1不对应绑定,SLIV2-1绑定后的比特对应空域绑定。Among them, the bits after binding SLIV1-1 and SLIV1-2 correspond to time domain binding, the bits after binding SLIV1-3 and SLIV1-4 correspond to time domain binding, SLIV2-1 does not correspond to binding, and SLIV2-1 binds The determined bits correspond to the airspace binding.
也就是说,在该示例中,反馈时隙n对应的时隙组中只包括时隙n-6、时隙n-4和时隙n-2,该HARQ-ACK码本中只包括3个比特,可以降低开销。That is to say, in this example, the time slot group corresponding to the feedback time slot n only includes time slot n-6, time slot n-4 and time slot n-2, and the HARQ-ACK codebook only includes 3 bits, which can reduce overhead.
在一些实施例中,第一设备例如终端设备被配置第一控制信息格式,其中,所述第一控制信息格式可以调度的物理信道的最大个数或最大时隙个数M大于或等于2;In some embodiments, the first device such as a terminal device is configured with a first control information format, wherein the maximum number of physical channels or the maximum number of time slots M that can be scheduled by the first control information format is greater than or equal to 2;
所述第一设备接收第二设备发送的第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度S个物理信道传输,S大于或等于1且小于或等于M,所述S个物理信道中的至少一个物理信道对应第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本对应第一反馈资源;The first device receives the first control information format sent by the second device, the first control information format schedules transmission of S physical channels, S is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to M, and the S physical channels are At least one physical channel corresponds to a first HARQ-ACK codebook, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook corresponds to a first feedback resource;
所述第一设备通过所述第一反馈资源发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本。The first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook by using the first feedback resource.
其中,该S个物理信道中的不同物理信道用于传输不同的TB。Wherein, different physical channels among the S physical channels are used to transmit different TBs.
其中,以DCI调度的物理信道为PDSCH为例,一个下行时隙对应的HARQ-ACK反馈比特数是根据该下行时隙中包括的候选PDSCH接收机会个数和一个候选PDSCH接收机会对应的最大反馈比特数中的至少一项确定的。Wherein, taking the physical channel scheduled by DCI as PDSCH as an example, the number of HARQ-ACK feedback bits corresponding to a downlink time slot is based on the number of candidate PDSCH receiver opportunities included in the downlink time slot and the maximum feedback number corresponding to a candidate PDSCH receiver opportunity At least one of the number of bits is determined.
其中,一组候选PDSCH接收机会对应的下行时隙是根据TDRA表格、M值、S值、K0值和K1值中的至少一项确定的。Wherein, the downlink time slots corresponding to a group of candidate PDSCH receivers are determined according to at least one of TDRA table, M value, S value, K0 value and K1 value.
在高频系统中,如果引入一个DCI调度多个物理信道的调度方式,且该多个物理信道用于传输不同TB,其中,终端设备可能被配置时域绑定反馈,或者,终端设备可能被配置一个DCI调度多个物理信道时每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的比特数与一个DCI调度一个物理信道时每个候选物理信道接收机会对应的比特数不同。在这些情况下,通过本申请中的方案确定的HARQ-ACK码本的大小的开销可以有效降低,也可以避免网络设备和终端设备对HARQ-ACK码本大小的理解不一致。In a high-frequency system, if a DCI is introduced to schedule multiple physical channels, and the multiple physical channels are used to transmit different TBs, the terminal device may be configured with time-domain bonding feedback, or the terminal device may be configured by The number of bits corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver when one DCI is configured to schedule multiple physical channels is different from the bit number corresponding to each candidate physical channel receiver when one DCI schedules one physical channel. In these cases, the overhead of the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook determined by the solution in this application can be effectively reduced, and it can also avoid inconsistencies in the understanding of the size of the HARQ-ACK codebook by the network device and the terminal device.
以上结合附图详细描述了本申请的优选实施方式,但是,本申请并不限于上述实施方式中的具体细节,在本申请的技术构思范围内,可以对本申请的技术方案进行多种简单变型,这些简单变型均属于本申请的保护范围。例如,在上述具体实施方式中所描述的各个具体技术特征,在不矛盾的情况下,可以通过任何合适的方式进行组合,为了避免不必要的重复,本申请对各种可能的组合方式不再另行说明。又例如,本申请的各种不同的实施方式之间也可以进行任意组合,只要其不违背本申请的思想,其同样应当视为本申请所公开的内容。又例如,在不冲突的前提下,本申请描述的各个实施例和/或各个实施例中的技术特征可以和现有技术任意的相互组合,组合之后得到的技术方案也应落入本申请的保护范围。The preferred embodiments of the present application have been described in detail above in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. However, the present application is not limited to the specific details in the above embodiments. Within the scope of the technical concept of the present application, various simple modifications can be made to the technical solutions of the present application. These simple modifications all belong to the protection scope of the present application. For example, the various specific technical features described in the above specific implementation manners can be combined in any suitable manner if there is no contradiction. Separately. As another example, any combination of various implementations of the present application can also be made, as long as they do not violate the idea of the present application, they should also be regarded as the content disclosed in the present application. For another example, on the premise of no conflict, the various embodiments described in this application and/or the technical features in each embodiment can be combined with the prior art arbitrarily, and the technical solutions obtained after the combination should also fall within the scope of this application. protected range.
还应理解,在本申请的各种方法实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。此外,在本申请实施例中,术语“下行”、“上行”和“侧行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向,其中,“下行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向为从站点发送至小区的用户设备的第一方向,“上行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向为从小区的用户设备发送至站点的第二方向,“侧行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向为从用户设备1发送至用户设备2的第三方向。例如,“下行信号”表示该信号的传输方向为第一方向。另外,本申请实施例中,术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系。具体地,A和/或B可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should also be understood that in the various method embodiments of the present application, the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes do not mean the order of execution, and the order of execution of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not be used in this application. The implementation of the examples constitutes no limitation. In addition, in this embodiment of the application, the terms "downlink", "uplink" and "sidelink" are used to indicate the transmission direction of signals or data, wherein "downlink" is used to indicate that the transmission direction of signals or data is sent from the station The first direction to the user equipment in the cell, "uplink" is used to indicate that the signal or data transmission direction is the second direction sent from the user equipment in the cell to the station, and "side line" is used to indicate that the signal or data transmission direction is A third direction sent from UE1 to UE2. For example, "downlink signal" indicates that the transmission direction of the signal is the first direction. In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the term "and/or" is only an association relationship describing associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships. Specifically, A and/or B may mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship.
图10是本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置的结构组成示意图,应用于第一设备,如图10所示,所述HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置包括:Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the structural composition of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device provided by the embodiment of the present application, which is applied to the first device. As shown in Figure 10, the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device includes:
第一确定单元1001,配置为确定第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应第一反馈时间单元;The first determining unit 1001 is configured to determine a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group, The time units in the first time unit group correspond to the first feedback time unit;
发送单元1002,配置为通过所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源向第二设备发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本;The sending unit 1002 is configured to send the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
在一些实施例中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据以下至少之一确定:In some embodiments, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to at least one of the following:
所述第一时间单元组中的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数;The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group;
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数;The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on a time unit in the first time unit group;
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会个数。The number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit in the first time unit group.
在一些实施例中,In some embodiments,
所述第一时间单元组中的第一候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数,所述第一候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道接收的情况;和/或,The first candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits, and the first candidate physical channel receiver corresponds to the case where a physical channel is scheduled to be received by the first control information format; and/ or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二候选物理信道接收机会对应第二反馈比特数,所述第二候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度至少两个物理信道接收的情况。The second candidate physical channel receivers in the first time unit group correspond to the second number of feedback bits, and the second candidate physical channel receivers correspond to the situation that the first control information format schedules reception of at least two physical channels.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数,包括以下至少一种情况:In some embodiments, the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group includes at least one of the following situations:
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会包括所述第一候选物理信道接收机会和所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数中的较大值;The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit The number of feedback bits corresponding to the receiver is the larger value of the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits;
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第一候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数;The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The number of first feedback bits;
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第二反馈比特数。The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The second feedback bit number.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一反馈比特数;和/或,In some embodiments, a candidate physical channel receiver on a first time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits; and/or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第二反馈比特数。A candidate physical channel receiver on a second time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the second number of feedback bits.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
所述第一反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
所述第一反馈比特数根据码块组CBG反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the code block group CBG feedback length;
在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一反馈比特数为1。In a case where spatial domain bundling feedback is configured, the first number of feedback bits is 1.
在一些实施例中,所述第二反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:In some embodiments, the second number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
所述第二反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The second number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
所述第二反馈比特数为1;The second feedback bit number is 1;
在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1;In the case of configured airspace bundling feedback, the second feedback bit number is 1;
在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1。In a case where time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the second number of feedback bits is 1.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits are different.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数大于或等于所述第二反馈比特数。In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits is greater than or equal to the second number of feedback bits.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据以下至少之一确定的:HARQ反馈时序集合、时域资源分配TDRA表格、TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV,其中,一个SLIV对应一个候选物理信道接收机会。In some embodiments, the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to at least one of the following: HARQ feedback timing set, time domain resource allocation TDRA table, at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table , where one SLIV corresponds to one candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元与所述第一反馈时间单元之间的第一时域偏移量是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set, where , the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;和/或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; and/or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA 表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV。The second time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the time unit other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV.
在一些实施例中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:In some embodiments, when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第三时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The third time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the last one in the first SLIV group in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain bonding feedback parameters.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the TDRA table, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元与第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量为第二时域偏移量,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The time domain offset between the second time unit in the first time unit group and the first time unit is a second time domain offset, and the second time domain offset is based on the TDRA table determined, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
在一些实施例中,所述第一SLIV行中包括至少两个SLIV,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the first SLIV row includes at least two SLIVs, and the second time domain offset is determined according to the TDRA table, including:
所述第二时域偏移量是所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行对应的至少一个K0值确定的;或,The second time domain offset is determined by at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格中的第二SLIV对应的时间单元与所述第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV,或,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The second time domain offset is based on the time domain offset between the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV in the TDRA table and the first time unit, and the second SLIV is the time domain offset in the TDRA table The SLIV other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the , or, in the case where time-domain binding feedback is configured, the second SLIV is the first SLIV in the TDRA table The last SLIV in the first SLIV group in the SLIV row, where the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain binding feedback parameters.
在一些实施例中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV。In some embodiments, the SLIV is an effective SLIV.
在一些实施例中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV,包括:In some embodiments, the SLIV is an effective SLIV comprising:
所述SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会为有效调度;或,The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is effectively scheduled; or,
所述第一设备可被调度根据所述SLIV进行物理信道接收。The first device may be scheduled to perform physical channel reception according to the SLIV.
在一些实施例中,所述第一设备收到的第一控制信息调度至少一个物理信道,所述第一控制信息对应所述第一控制信息格式,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述至少一个物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息。In some embodiments, the first control information received by the first device schedules at least one physical channel, the first control information corresponds to the first control information format, and the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the at least one physical channel.
在一些实施例中,所述至少一个物理信道中的第一物理信道对应第一时间单元,其中,所述第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应第二反馈比特数X,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。In some embodiments, a first physical channel of the at least one physical channel corresponds to a first time unit, wherein a candidate physical channel receiver on the first time unit corresponds to a first feedback bit number Y, and the The first physical channel corresponds to the second number of feedback bits X, and the first number of feedback bits is different from the second number of feedback bits.
在一些实施例中,所述第二反馈比特数X小于所述第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应的X个HARQ-ACK信息比特位于所述Y个HARQ-ACK信息比特中的前X个HARQ-ACK信息比特。In some embodiments, the second feedback bit number X is smaller than the first feedback bit number Y, and the X HARQ-ACK information bits corresponding to the first physical channel are located in the Y HARQ-ACK information bits The first X HARQ-ACK information bits of .
在一些实施例中,在被配置时域绑定反馈和空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一设备的绑定反馈方式为:In some embodiments, when time-domain bundling feedback and air-space bundling feedback are configured, the bundling feedback mode of the first device is:
先进行空域绑定,再进行时域绑定。The air domain binding is performed first, and then the time domain binding is performed.
在一些实施例中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,当所述第一设备被配置的传输块TB反馈长度大于1时,所述第一设备的绑定反馈方式为:In some embodiments, when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, when the configured transport block TB feedback length of the first device is greater than 1, the bundling feedback mode of the first device is:
先进行空域绑定,再进行时域绑定。The air domain binding is performed first, and then the time domain binding is performed.
在一些实施例中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一设备在进行时域绑定时假设未被调度的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK。In some embodiments, when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the first device assumes that HARQ-ACK information corresponding to unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers is ACK when performing time-domain bundling.
在一些实施例中,所述第一设备为终端,所述第二设备为网络设备,所述物理信道包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括上行反馈资源;或,In some embodiments, the first device is a terminal, the second device is a network device, the physical channel includes a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include uplink feedback resources; or,
所述第一设备为第一终端,所述第二设备为第二终端,所述物理信道包括物理侧行共享信道PSSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括侧行反馈资源。The first device is a first terminal, the second device is a second terminal, the physical channel includes a physical sidelink shared channel PSSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include sidelink feedback resources.
在一些实施例中,所述第一设备被配置类型Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本反馈。In some embodiments, the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
图11是本申请实施例提供的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置的结构组成示意图,应用于第二设备,如图11所示,所述HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置包括:Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of the structural composition of the feedback device of the HARQ-ACK codebook provided by the embodiment of the present application, which is applied to the second device. As shown in Fig. 11, the feedback device of the HARQ-ACK codebook includes:
接收单元1101,配置为通过第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源接收第一设备发送第一HARQ-ACK码本;The receiving unit 1101 is configured to receive the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit;
第二确定单1102,配置为根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的物理信道接收对应的HARQ-ACK信息;The second determining unit 1102 is configured to determine, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the corresponding HARQ-ACK information received by the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group;
其中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接 收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应所述第一反馈时间单元;Wherein, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
在一些实施例中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据以下至少之一确定:In some embodiments, the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to at least one of the following:
所述第一时间单元组中的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数;The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group;
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数;The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on a time unit in the first time unit group;
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会个数。The number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit in the first time unit group.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的第一候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数,所述第一候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道接收的情况;和/或,In some embodiments, the first candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits, and the first candidate physical channel receiver schedules a physical channel corresponding to the first control information format the circumstances of receipt; and/or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二候选物理信道接收机会对应第二反馈比特数,所述第二候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度至少两个物理信道接收的情况。The second candidate physical channel receivers in the first time unit group correspond to the second number of feedback bits, and the second candidate physical channel receivers correspond to the situation that the first control information format schedules reception of at least two physical channels.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数,包括以下至少一种情况:In some embodiments, the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group includes at least one of the following situations:
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会包括所述第一候选物理信道接收机会和所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数中的较大值;The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit The number of feedback bits corresponding to the receiver is the larger value of the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits;
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第一候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数;The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The number of first feedback bits;
所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第二反馈比特数。The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The second feedback bit number.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一反馈比特数;和/或,In some embodiments, a candidate physical channel receiver on a first time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits; and/or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第二反馈比特数。A candidate physical channel receiver on a second time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the second number of feedback bits.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
所述第一反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
所述第一反馈比特数根据码块组CBG反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the code block group CBG feedback length;
在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一反馈比特数为1。In a case where spatial domain bundling feedback is configured, the first number of feedback bits is 1.
在一些实施例中,所述第二反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:In some embodiments, the second number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
所述第二反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The second number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
所述第二反馈比特数为1;The second feedback bit number is 1;
在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1;In the case of configured airspace bundling feedback, the second feedback bit number is 1;
在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1。In a case where time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the second number of feedback bits is 1.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits are different.
在一些实施例中,所述第一反馈比特数大于或等于所述第二反馈比特数。In some embodiments, the first number of feedback bits is greater than or equal to the second number of feedback bits.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据以下至少之一确定的:HARQ反馈时序集合、时域资源分配TDRA表格、TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV,其中,一个SLIV对应一个候选物理信道接收机会。In some embodiments, the time unit in the first time unit group is determined according to at least one of the following: HARQ feedback timing set, time domain resource allocation TDRA table, at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table , where one SLIV corresponds to one candidate physical channel receiver opportunity.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元与所述第一反馈时间单元之间的第一时域偏移量是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set, where , the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;和/或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; and/or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV。The second time unit in the first time unit group is a time unit corresponding to a second SLIV, and the second SLIV is a time unit other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV.
在一些实施例中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:In some embodiments, when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The second time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the last one in the first SLIV group in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain bonding feedback parameters.
在一些实施例中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the TDRA table, including:
所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元与第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量为第二时域偏移量,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一起始长度指示SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The time domain offset between the second time unit in the first time unit group and the first time unit is a second time domain offset, and the second time domain offset is based on the TDRA table determined, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first initial length indication SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
在一些实施例中,所述第一SLIV行中包括至少两个SLIV,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:In some embodiments, the first SLIV row includes at least two SLIVs, and the second time domain offset is determined according to the TDRA table, including:
所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行对应的至少一个K0值确定的;或,The second time domain offset is determined according to at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格中的第二SLIV对应的时间单元与所述第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV,或,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The second time domain offset is based on the time domain offset between the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV in the TDRA table and the first time unit, and the second SLIV is the time domain offset in the TDRA table The SLIV other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the , or, in the case where time-domain binding feedback is configured, the second SLIV is the first SLIV in the TDRA table The last SLIV in the first SLIV group in the SLIV row, where the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain binding feedback parameters.
在一些实施例中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV。In some embodiments, the SLIV is an effective SLIV.
在一些实施例中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV,包括:In some embodiments, the SLIV is an effective SLIV comprising:
所述SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会为有效调度;或,The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is effectively scheduled; or,
所述第一设备可被调度根据所述SLIV进行物理信道接收。The first device may be scheduled to perform physical channel reception according to the SLIV.
在一些实施例中,所述第二设备向所述第一设备发送用于调度至少一个物理信道的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息对应所述第一控制信息格式,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述至少一个物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息。In some embodiments, the second device sends first control information for scheduling at least one physical channel to the first device, the first control information corresponds to the first control information format, and the first The HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the at least one physical channel.
在一些实施例中,所述至少一个物理信道中的第一物理信道对应第一时间单元,其中,所述第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应第二反馈比特数X,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。In some embodiments, a first physical channel of the at least one physical channel corresponds to a first time unit, wherein a candidate physical channel receiver on the first time unit corresponds to a first feedback bit number Y, and the The first physical channel corresponds to the second number of feedback bits X, and the first number of feedback bits is different from the second number of feedback bits.
在一些实施例中,所述第二反馈比特数X小于所述第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应的X个HARQ-ACK信息比特位于所述Y个HARQ-ACK信息比特中的前X个HARQ-ACK信息比特。In some embodiments, the second feedback bit number X is smaller than the first feedback bit number Y, and the X HARQ-ACK information bits corresponding to the first physical channel are located in the Y HARQ-ACK information bits The first X HARQ-ACK information bits of .
在一些实施例中,在所述第一设备被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本中的一个码字的HARQ-ACK信息确定至少两个码字的HARQ-ACK信息。In some embodiments, when the first device is configured with spatial domain bundling feedback, the second device determines at least two HARQ-ACK information of codewords.
在一些实施例中,在所述第一设备被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本中的一个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息确定至少两个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息。In some embodiments, when the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the second device determines at least HARQ-ACK information of two physical channels.
在一些实施例中,在所述第一设备被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备假设未被调度的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK。In some embodiments, when the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the second device assumes that HARQ-ACK information corresponding to unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers is ACK.
在一些实施例中,所述第一设备为终端,所述第二设备为网络设备,所述物理信道包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括上行反馈资源;或,In some embodiments, the first device is a terminal, the second device is a network device, the physical channel includes a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include uplink feedback resources; or,
所述第一设备为第一终端,所述第二设备为第二终端,所述物理信道包括物理侧行共享信道PSSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括侧行反馈资源。The first device is a first terminal, the second device is a second terminal, the physical channel includes a physical sidelink shared channel PSSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include sidelink feedback resources.
在一些实施例中,所述第一设备被配置类型Type-1 HARQ-ACK码本反馈。In some embodiments, the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
本领域技术人员应当理解,本申请实施例的上述HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置的相关描述可以参照本申请实施例的HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法的相关描述进行理解。Those skilled in the art should understand that the relevant description of the above-mentioned HARQ-ACK codebook feedback apparatus in the embodiment of the present application can be understood with reference to the relevant description of the HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method in the embodiment of the present application.
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备1200示意性结构图。该通信设备可以第一设备,也可以是第二设备,其中,第一设备可为终端设备,第二设备可为终端设备或网络。图12所示的通信设备1200包括处理器1210,处理器1210可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Fig. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1200 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device may be a first device or a second device, wherein the first device may be a terminal device, and the second device may be a terminal device or a network. The communication device 1200 shown in FIG. 12 includes a processor 1210, and the processor 1210 can invoke and run a computer program from a memory, so as to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,如图12所示,通信设备1200还可以包括存储器1220。其中,处理器1210可以从存储器1220中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 12 , the communication device 1200 may further include a memory 1220 . Wherein, the processor 1210 can invoke and run a computer program from the memory 1220, so as to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,存储器1220可以是独立于处理器1210的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器1210中。Wherein, the memory 1220 may be an independent device independent of the processor 1210 , or may be integrated in the processor 1210 .
可选地,如图12所示,通信设备1200还可以包括收发器1230,处理器1210可以控制该收发器1230与其他设备进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备发送信息或数据,或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 12, the communication device 1200 may further include a transceiver 1230, and the processor 1210 may control the transceiver 1230 to communicate with other devices, specifically, to send information or data to other devices, or receive other Information or data sent by the device.
其中,收发器1230可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器1230还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。Wherein, the transceiver 1230 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 1230 may further include antennas, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
可选地,该通信设备1200具体可为本申请实施例的第一设备,并且该通信设备1200可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由第一设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the communication device 1200 may specifically be the first device in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1200 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. Let me repeat.
可选地,该通信设备1200具体可为本申请实施例的第二设备,并且该通信设备1200可以实现本申 请实施例的各个方法中由第二设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the communication device 1200 may specifically be the second device in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1200 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. Let me repeat.
图13是本申请实施例的芯片的示意性结构图。图13所示的芯片1300包括处理器1310,处理器1310可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application. The chip 1300 shown in FIG. 13 includes a processor 1310, and the processor 1310 can call and run a computer program from a memory, so as to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,如图13所示,芯片1300还可以包括存储器1320。其中,处理器1310可以从存储器1320中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 13 , the chip 1300 may further include a memory 1320 . Wherein, the processor 1310 can invoke and run a computer program from the memory 1320, so as to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,存储器1320可以是独立于处理器1310的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器1310中。Wherein, the memory 1320 may be an independent device independent of the processor 1310 , or may be integrated in the processor 1310 .
可选地,该芯片1300还可以包括输入接口1330。其中,处理器1310可以控制该输入接口1330与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。Optionally, the chip 1300 may also include an input interface 1330 . Wherein, the processor 1310 can control the input interface 1330 to communicate with other devices or chips, specifically, can obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
可选地,该芯片1300还可以包括输出接口1340。其中,处理器1310可以控制该输出接口1340与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。Optionally, the chip 1300 may also include an output interface 1340 . Wherein, the processor 1310 can control the output interface 1340 to communicate with other devices or chips, specifically, can output information or data to other devices or chips.
可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的第一设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由第一设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the first device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的第二设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由第二设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the second device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the second device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
应理解,本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片,系统芯片,芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。It should be understood that the chip mentioned in the embodiment of the present application may also be called a system-on-chip, a system-on-chip, a system-on-a-chip, or a system-on-a-chip.
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统1400的示意性框图。如图14所示,该通信系统1400包括第一设备1410和第二设备1420。Fig. 14 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 1400 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 14 , the communication system 1400 includes a first device 1410 and a second device 1420 .
其中,该第一设备1410可以用于实现上述方法中由第一设备实现的相应的功能,以及该第二设备1420可以用于实现上述方法中由第二设备实现的相应的功能为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, the first device 1410 can be used to realize the corresponding functions realized by the first device in the above method, and the second device 1420 can be used to realize the corresponding functions realized by the second device in the above method. This will not be repeated here.
应理解,本申请实施例的处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be understood that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method embodiments may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other available Program logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. Various methods, steps, and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented or executed. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or the processor may be any conventional processor, or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware decoding processor, or implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, register. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electronically programmable Erase Programmable Read-Only Memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or Flash. The volatile memory can be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as external cache memory. By way of illustration and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as Static Random Access Memory (Static RAM, SRAM), Dynamic Random Access Memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM ) and Direct Memory Bus Random Access Memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
应理解,上述存储器为示例性但不是限制性说明,例如,本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)以及直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)等等。也就是说,本申请实施例中的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It should be understood that the above-mentioned memory is illustrative but not restrictive. For example, the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection Dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM), etc. That is, the memory in the embodiments of the present application is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer programs.
可选的,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的第一设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由第一设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the first device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application. For brevity, I won't repeat them here.
可选地,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的第二设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由第二设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium may be applied to the second device in the embodiment of the present application, and the computer program causes the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For brevity, I won't repeat them here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
可选的,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的第一设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由第一设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the first device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the first device in the methods of the embodiments of the present application. For brevity, the This will not be repeated here.
可选地,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的第二设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由第二设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the second device in the embodiment of the present application, and the computer program instructions cause the computer to execute the corresponding process implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application. For brevity, in This will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program.
可选的,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的第一设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由第一设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program may be applied to the first device in the embodiment of the present application, and when the computer program is run on the computer, the computer executes the corresponding process implemented by the first device in each method of the embodiment of the present application, For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选地,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的第二设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由第二设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program can be applied to the second device in the embodiment of the present application, and when the computer program is run on the computer, the computer executes the corresponding process implemented by the second device in each method of the embodiment of the present application, For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those skilled in the art can appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented. In another point, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,)ROM、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions described above are realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory,) ROM, random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc, etc., which can store program codes. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific implementation of the application, but the scope of protection of the application is not limited thereto. Anyone familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the application. Should be covered within the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be based on the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (62)

  1. 一种混合自动重传请求应答HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法,所述方法包括:A hybrid automatic repeat request response HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method, the method comprising:
    第一设备确定第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应第一反馈时间单元;The first device determines the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit in the first time unit group, the first time unit The time unit in the unit group corresponds to the first feedback time unit;
    所述第一设备通过所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源向第二设备发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本;The first device sends the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
    其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据以下至少之一确定:The method according to claim 1, wherein the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to at least one of the following:
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数;The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group;
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数;The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on a time unit in the first time unit group;
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会个数。The number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit in the first time unit group.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 2, wherein,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数,所述第一候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道的情况;和/或,The first candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits, and the first candidate physical channel receiver corresponds to the case where a physical channel is scheduled in the first control information format; and/or ,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二候选物理信道接收机会对应第二反馈比特数,所述第二候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度至少两个物理信道的情况。The second candidate physical channel receivers in the first time unit group correspond to the second number of feedback bits, and the second candidate physical channel receivers correspond to the condition that the first control information format schedules at least two physical channels.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数,包括以下至少一种情况:The method according to claim 3, wherein the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group includes at least one of the following situations:
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会包括所述第一候选物理信道接收机会和所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数中的较大值;The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit The number of feedback bits corresponding to the receiver is the larger value of the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits;
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第一候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数;The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The number of first feedback bits;
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第二反馈比特数。The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The second feedback bit number.
  5. 根据权利要求2至4中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一反馈比特数;和/或,A candidate physical channel receiver on a first time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits; and/or,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第二反馈比特数。A candidate physical channel receiver on a second time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the second number of feedback bits.
  6. 根据权利要求3至5中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:The method according to any one of claims 3 to 5, wherein the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
    所述第一反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
    所述第一反馈比特数根据码块组CBG反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the code block group CBG feedback length;
    在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一反馈比特数为1。In a case where spatial domain bundling feedback is configured, the first number of feedback bits is 1.
  7. 根据权利要求3至6中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第二反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:The method according to any one of claims 3 to 6, wherein the second number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
    所述第二反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The second number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
    所述第二反馈比特数为1;The second feedback bit number is 1;
    在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1;In the case of configured airspace bundling feedback, the second feedback bit number is 1;
    在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1。In a case where time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the second number of feedback bits is 1.
  8. 根据权利要求3至7中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。The method according to any one of claims 3 to 7, wherein the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits are different.
  9. 根据权利要求3至8中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一反馈比特数大于或等于所述第二反馈比特数。The method according to any one of claims 3 to 8, wherein the first number of feedback bits is greater than or equal to the second number of feedback bits.
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据以下至少之一确定的:HARQ反馈时序集合、时域资源分配TDRA表格、TDRA表格中的至少一 行符号起始长度指示SLIV,其中,一个SLIV对应一个候选物理信道接收机会。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one of the following: HARQ feedback timing set, time domain resource allocation TDRA table, TDRA At least one row of symbol start length in the table indicates SLIV, where one SLIV corresponds to one candidate physical channel receiving opportunity.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合确定的,包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, comprising:
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元与所述第一反馈时间单元之间的第一时域偏移量是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set, where , the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;和/或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; and/or,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV。The second time unit in the first time unit group is a time unit corresponding to a second SLIV, and the second SLIV is a time unit other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV.
  13. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein, in the case of configuring time-domain bundling feedback, the time units in the first time unit group are based on at least one line of symbol start length in the TDRA table Instructions determined by SLIV include:
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第三时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The third time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the last one in the first SLIV group in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain bonding feedback parameters.
  14. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the TDRA table, comprising:
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元与第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量为第二时域偏移量,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The time domain offset between the second time unit in the first time unit group and the first time unit is a second time domain offset, and the second time domain offset is based on the TDRA table determined, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其中,所述第一SLIV行中包括至少两个SLIV,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein the first SLIV row includes at least two SLIVs, and the second time domain offset is determined according to the TDRA table, comprising:
    所述第二时域偏移量是所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行对应的至少一个K0值确定的;或,The second time domain offset is determined by at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
    所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格中的第二SLIV对应的时间单元与所述第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV,或,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The second time domain offset is based on the time domain offset between the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV in the TDRA table and the first time unit, and the second SLIV is the time domain offset in the TDRA table The SLIV other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the , or, in the case where time-domain binding feedback is configured, the second SLIV is the first SLIV in the TDRA table The last SLIV in the first SLIV group in the SLIV row, where the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain binding feedback parameters.
  16. 根据权利要求10至15中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV。The method according to any one of claims 10 to 15, wherein the SLIV is an effective SLIV.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV,包括:The method according to claim 16, wherein the SLIV is an effective SLIV comprising:
    所述SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会为有效调度;或,The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is effectively scheduled; or,
    所述第一设备可被调度根据所述SLIV进行物理信道接收。The first device may be scheduled to perform physical channel reception according to the SLIV.
  18. 根据权利要求1至17中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一设备收到的第一控制信息调度至少一个物理信道,所述第一控制信息对应所述第一控制信息格式,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述至少一个物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 17, wherein the first control information received by the first device schedules at least one physical channel, and the first control information corresponds to the first control information format, The first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the at least one physical channel.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其中,所述至少一个物理信道中的第一物理信道对应第一时间单元,其中,所述第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应第二反馈比特数X,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。The method according to claim 18, wherein a first physical channel of the at least one physical channel corresponds to a first time unit, wherein a candidate physical channel receiver on the first time unit corresponds to a first feedback bit The number Y, the first physical channel corresponds to the second number of feedback bits X, and the first number of feedback bits is different from the second number of feedback bits.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其中,所述第二反馈比特数X小于所述第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应的X个HARQ-ACK信息比特位于所述Y个HARQ-ACK信息比特中的前X个HARQ-ACK信息比特。The method according to claim 19, wherein the second feedback bit number X is smaller than the first feedback bit number Y, and the X HARQ-ACK information bits corresponding to the first physical channel are located in the Y HARQ - The first X HARQ-ACK information bits among the ACK information bits.
  21. 根据权利要求1至20中任一项所述的方法,其中,在被配置时域绑定反馈和空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一设备的绑定反馈方式为:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 20, wherein, when time-domain bundling feedback and air-domain bundling feedback are configured, the bundling feedback mode of the first device is:
    先进行空域绑定,再进行时域绑定。The air domain binding is performed first, and then the time domain binding is performed.
  22. 根据权利要求1至20中任一项所述的方法,其中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,当所述第一设备被配置的传输块TB反馈长度大于1时,所述第一设备的绑定反馈方式为:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 20, wherein, when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, when the configured transport block TB feedback length of the first device is greater than 1, the second The binding feedback method of a device is:
    先进行空域绑定,再进行时域绑定。The air domain binding is performed first, and then the time domain binding is performed.
  23. 根据权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法,其中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述 第一设备在进行时域绑定时假设未被调度的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 22, wherein, when time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the first device assumes that the unscheduled candidate physical channel receives The HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the opportunity is ACK.
  24. 根据权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 1 to 23, wherein,
    所述第一设备为终端,所述第二设备为网络设备,所述物理信道包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括上行反馈资源;或,The first device is a terminal, the second device is a network device, the physical channel includes a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include uplink feedback resources; or,
    所述第一设备为第一终端,所述第二设备为第二终端,所述物理信道包括物理侧行共享信道PSSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括侧行反馈资源。The first device is a first terminal, the second device is a second terminal, the physical channel includes a physical sidelink shared channel PSSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include sidelink feedback resources.
  25. 根据权利要求1至24中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一设备被配置类型Type-1HARQ-ACK码本反馈。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 24, wherein the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
  26. 一种混合自动重传请求应答HARQ-ACK码本的反馈方法,所述方法包括:A hybrid automatic repeat request response HARQ-ACK codebook feedback method, the method comprising:
    第二设备通过第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源接收第一设备发送第一HARQ-ACK码本;The second device receives the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit;
    所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的物理信道接收对应的HARQ-ACK信息;The second device determines, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, that a physical channel on a time unit in the first time unit group receives corresponding HARQ-ACK information;
    其中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应所述第一反馈时间单元;Wherein, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
    其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本对应的反馈比特数根据以下至少之一确定:The method according to claim 26, wherein the number of feedback bits corresponding to the first HARQ-ACK codebook is determined according to at least one of the following:
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数;The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group;
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数;The number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on a time unit in the first time unit group;
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会个数。The number of candidate physical channel receiver opportunities in one time unit in the first time unit group.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 27, wherein,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数,所述第一候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度一个物理信道接收的情况;和/或,The first candidate physical channel receiver in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits, and the first candidate physical channel receiver corresponds to the case where a physical channel is scheduled to be received by the first control information format; and/ or,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二候选物理信道接收机会对应第二反馈比特数,所述第二候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一控制信息格式调度至少两个物理信道接收的情况。The second candidate physical channel receivers in the first time unit group correspond to the second number of feedback bits, and the second candidate physical channel receivers correspond to the situation that the first control information format schedules reception of at least two physical channels.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数,包括以下至少一种情况:The method according to claim 28, wherein the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver on a time unit in the first time unit group includes at least one of the following situations:
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会包括所述第一候选物理信道接收机会和所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数中的较大值;The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group includes the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity and the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit The number of feedback bits corresponding to the receiver is the larger value of the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits;
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第一候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第一反馈比特数;The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the first candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The number of first feedback bits;
    所述第一时间单元组中的一个时间单元对应的候选物理信道接收机会为所述第二候选物理信道接收机会,所述时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应的反馈比特数为所述第二反馈比特数。The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to a time unit in the first time unit group is the second candidate physical channel receiver opportunity, and the number of feedback bits corresponding to a candidate physical channel receiver opportunity on the time unit is the The second feedback bit number.
  30. 根据权利要求27至29中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 27 to 29, wherein,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第一反馈比特数;和/或,A candidate physical channel receiver on a first time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first number of feedback bits; and/or,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应所述第二反馈比特数。A candidate physical channel receiver on a second time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the second number of feedback bits.
  31. 根据权利要求28至30中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:The method according to any one of claims 28 to 30, wherein the first number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following situations:
    所述第一反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
    所述第一反馈比特数根据码块组CBG反馈长度确定;The first number of feedback bits is determined according to the code block group CBG feedback length;
    在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一反馈比特数为1。In a case where spatial domain bundling feedback is configured, the first number of feedback bits is 1.
  32. 根据权利要求28至31中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第二反馈比特数根据以下情况中的至少一种确定:The method according to any one of claims 28 to 31, wherein the second number of feedback bits is determined according to at least one of the following conditions:
    所述第二反馈比特数根据传输块TB反馈长度确定;The second number of feedback bits is determined according to the feedback length of the transport block TB;
    所述第二反馈比特数为1;The second feedback bit number is 1;
    在被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1;In the case of configured airspace bundling feedback, the second feedback bit number is 1;
    在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二反馈比特数为1。In a case where time-domain bundling feedback is configured, the second number of feedback bits is 1.
  33. 根据权利要求28至32中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈 比特数不同。The method of any one of claims 28 to 32, wherein the first number of feedback bits and the second number of feedback bits are different.
  34. 根据权利要求28至33中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一反馈比特数大于或等于所述第二反馈比特数。The method according to any one of claims 28 to 33, wherein the first number of feedback bits is greater than or equal to the second number of feedback bits.
  35. 根据权利要求26至34中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据以下至少之一确定的:HARQ反馈时序集合、时域资源分配TDRA表格、TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV,其中,一个SLIV对应一个候选物理信道接收机会。The method according to any one of claims 26 to 34, wherein the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one of the following: HARQ feedback timing set, time domain resource allocation TDRA table, TDRA At least one row of symbol start length in the table indicates SLIV, where one SLIV corresponds to one candidate physical channel receiving opportunity.
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合确定的,包括:The method according to claim 35, wherein the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the HARQ feedback timing set, comprising:
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元与所述第一反馈时间单元之间的第一时域偏移量是根据所述HARQ反馈时序集合中的HARQ反馈时序指示信息确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The first time domain offset between the first time unit in the first time unit group and the first feedback time unit is determined according to the HARQ feedback timing indication information in the HARQ feedback timing set, where , the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  37. 根据权利要求35或36所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:The method according to claim 35 or 36, wherein the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to at least one line of symbol start length indication SLIV in the TDRA table, including:
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;和/或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; and/or,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV。The second time unit in the first time unit group is a time unit corresponding to a second SLIV, and the second SLIV is a time unit other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV.
  38. 根据权利要求35或36所述的方法,其中,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格中的至少一行符号起始长度指示SLIV确定的,包括:The method according to claim 35 or 36, wherein, in the case of configuring time-domain bundling feedback, the time units in the first time unit group are based on at least one line of symbol start length in the TDRA table Instructions determined by SLIV include:
    所述第一时间单元组中的第一时间单元为第一SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV;或,The first time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the first SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元为第二SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The second time unit in the first time unit group is the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV, and the second SLIV is the last one in the first SLIV group in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table SLIV, wherein the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain bonding feedback parameters.
  39. 根据权利要求35或36所述的方法,其中,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:The method according to claim 35 or 36, wherein the time units in the first time unit group are determined according to the TDRA table, comprising:
    所述第一时间单元组中的第二时间单元与第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量为第二时域偏移量,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,其中,所述第一时间单元为第一起始长度指示SLIV对应的时间单元,所述第一SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行中的最后一个SLIV。The time domain offset between the second time unit in the first time unit group and the first time unit is a second time domain offset, and the second time domain offset is based on the TDRA table determined, wherein the first time unit is the time unit corresponding to the first initial length indication SLIV, and the first SLIV is the last SLIV in the first SLIV row in the TDRA table.
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的方法,其中,所述第一SLIV行中包括至少两个SLIV,所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格确定的,包括:The method according to claim 39, wherein the first SLIV row includes at least two SLIVs, and the second time domain offset is determined according to the TDRA table, comprising:
    所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格中的第一SLIV行对应的至少一个K0值确定的;或,The second time domain offset is determined according to at least one K0 value corresponding to the first SLIV row in the TDRA table; or,
    所述第二时域偏移量是根据所述TDRA表格中的第二SLIV对应的时间单元与所述第一时间单元之间的时域偏移量,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的除所述第一SLIV外的SLIV,或,在被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二SLIV为所述TDRA表格中的所述第一SLIV行中的第一SLIV组中的最后一个SLIV,其中,所述第一SLIV组是根据时域绑定反馈参数确定的。The second time domain offset is based on the time domain offset between the time unit corresponding to the second SLIV in the TDRA table and the first time unit, and the second SLIV is the time domain offset in the TDRA table The SLIV other than the first SLIV in the first SLIV row in the , or, in the case where time-domain binding feedback is configured, the second SLIV is the first SLIV in the TDRA table The last SLIV in the first SLIV group in the SLIV row, where the first SLIV group is determined according to time-domain binding feedback parameters.
  41. 根据权利要求35至40中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV。The method of any one of claims 35 to 40, wherein the SLIV is an effective SLIV.
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的方法,其中,所述SLIV为有效SLIV,包括:The method of claim 41, wherein the SLIV is an active SLIV comprising:
    所述SLIV对应的候选物理信道接收机会为有效调度;或,The candidate physical channel receiver opportunity corresponding to the SLIV is effectively scheduled; or,
    所述第一设备可被调度根据所述SLIV进行物理信道接收。The first device may be scheduled to perform physical channel reception according to the SLIV.
  43. 根据权利要求26至42中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第二设备向所述第一设备发送用于调度至少一个物理信道的第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息对应所述第一控制信息格式,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述至少一个物理信道对应的HARQ-ACK信息。The method according to any one of claims 26 to 42, wherein the second device sends to the first device first control information for scheduling at least one physical channel, the first control information corresponding to the The first control information format, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the at least one physical channel.
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的方法,其中,所述至少一个物理信道中的第一物理信道对应第一时间单元,其中,所述第一时间单元上的一个候选物理信道接收机会对应第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应第二反馈比特数X,所述第一反馈比特数和所述第二反馈比特数不同。The method according to claim 43, wherein a first physical channel of the at least one physical channel corresponds to a first time unit, wherein a candidate physical channel receiver on the first time unit corresponds to a first feedback bit The number Y, the first physical channel corresponds to the second number of feedback bits X, and the first number of feedback bits is different from the second number of feedback bits.
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法,其中,所述第二反馈比特数X小于所述第一反馈比特数Y,所述第一物理信道对应的X个HARQ-ACK信息比特位于所述Y个HARQ-ACK信息比特中的前X个HARQ-ACK信息比特。The method according to claim 44, wherein the second feedback bit number X is smaller than the first feedback bit number Y, and the X HARQ-ACK information bits corresponding to the first physical channel are located in the Y HARQ - The first X HARQ-ACK information bits among the ACK information bits.
  46. 根据权利要求26至45中任一项所述的方法,其中,在所述第一设备被配置空域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本中的一个码字的HARQ-ACK信息确定至少 两个码字的HARQ-ACK信息。The method according to any one of claims 26 to 45, wherein, when the first device is configured with spatial domain bundling feedback, the second device according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook The HARQ-ACK information of one codeword determines the HARQ-ACK information of at least two codewords.
  47. 根据权利要求26至45中任一项所述的方法,其中,在所述第一设备被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本中的一个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息确定至少两个物理信道的HARQ-ACK信息。The method according to any one of claims 26 to 45, wherein, when the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the second device according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook The HARQ-ACK information of one physical channel determines the HARQ-ACK information of at least two physical channels.
  48. 根据权利要求26至47中任一项所述的方法,其中,在所述第一设备被配置时域绑定反馈的情况下,所述第二设备假设未被调度的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息为ACK。The method according to any one of claims 26 to 47, wherein when the first device is configured with time-domain bundling feedback, the second device assumes that the unscheduled candidate physical channel receivers will correspond to The HARQ-ACK information is ACK.
  49. 根据权利要求26至48中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 26 to 48, wherein,
    所述第一设备为终端,所述第二设备为网络设备,所述物理信道包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括上行反馈资源;或,The first device is a terminal, the second device is a network device, the physical channel includes a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include uplink feedback resources; or,
    所述第一设备为第一终端,所述第二设备为第二终端,所述物理信道包括物理侧行共享信道PSSCH,所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源包括侧行反馈资源。The first device is a first terminal, the second device is a second terminal, the physical channel includes a physical sidelink shared channel PSSCH, and the feedback resources in the first feedback time unit include sidelink feedback resources.
  50. 根据权利要求26至49中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述第一设备被配置类型Type-1HARQ-ACK码本反馈。The method according to any one of claims 26 to 49, wherein the first device is configured with Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook feedback.
  51. 一种混合自动重传请求应答HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置,包括:A hybrid automatic repeat request response HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device, comprising:
    第一确定单元,配置为确定第一HARQ-ACK码本,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应第一反馈时间单元;The first determination unit is configured to determine a first HARQ-ACK codebook, where the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes HARQ-ACK information corresponding to candidate physical channel receiver opportunities on time units in the first time unit group, the The time unit in the first time unit group corresponds to the first feedback time unit;
    发送单元,配置为通过所述第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源向第二设备发送所述第一HARQ-ACK码本;a sending unit configured to send the first HARQ-ACK codebook to the second device through the feedback resource in the first feedback time unit;
    其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  52. 一种混合自动重传请求应答HARQ-ACK码本的反馈装置,包括:A hybrid automatic repeat request response HARQ-ACK codebook feedback device, comprising:
    接收单元,配置为通过第一反馈时间单元上的反馈资源接收第一设备发送第一HARQ-ACK码本;The receiving unit is configured to receive the first HARQ-ACK codebook sent by the first device through the feedback resource on the first feedback time unit;
    第二确定单元,配置为根据所述第一HARQ-ACK码本确定第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的物理信道接收对应的HARQ-ACK信息;The second determination unit is configured to determine, according to the first HARQ-ACK codebook, the corresponding HARQ-ACK information received by the physical channel on the time unit in the first time unit group;
    其中,所述第一HARQ-ACK码本包括所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元上的候选物理信道接收机会对应的HARQ-ACK信息,所述第一时间单元组中的时间单元对应所述第一反馈时间单元;Wherein, the first HARQ-ACK codebook includes the HARQ-ACK information corresponding to the candidate physical channel receivers on the time units in the first time unit group, and the time units in the first time unit group correspond to the The first feedback time unit;
    其中,所述第一设备被配置第一控制信息格式,所述第一控制信息格式调度的物理信道的最大数量为M,所述M大于或等于2。Wherein, the first device is configured with a first control information format, the maximum number of physical channels scheduled by the first control information format is M, and the M is greater than or equal to 2.
  53. 一种通信设备,包括:处理器和存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行如权利要求1至25中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, comprising: a processor and a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, the processor is used to invoke and run the computer program stored in the memory, and execute the computer program described in any one of claims 1 to 25 Methods.
  54. 一种通信设备,包括:处理器和存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行如权利要求26至50中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, comprising: a processor and a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program, the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, and perform the process described in any one of claims 26 to 50 Methods.
  55. 一种芯片,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1至25中任一项所述的方法。A chip, comprising: a processor for invoking and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the method according to any one of claims 1 to 25.
  56. 一种芯片,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求26至50中任一项所述的方法。A chip, comprising: a processor for invoking and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the method as claimed in any one of claims 26 to 50.
  57. 一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求1至25中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program, the computer program causing a computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 25.
  58. 一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求26至50中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program, the computer program causing a computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 26 to 50.
  59. 一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行如权利要求1至25中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising computer program instructions causing a computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 25.
  60. 一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令,该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行如权利要求26至50中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising computer program instructions for causing a computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 26 to 50.
  61. 一种计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求1至25中任一项所述的方法。A computer program which causes a computer to carry out the method according to any one of claims 1 to 25.
  62. 一种计算机程序,所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求26至50中任一项所述的方法。A computer program that causes a computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 26 to 50.
PCT/CN2021/111350 2021-08-06 2021-08-06 Feedback method and apparatus for harq-ack codebook, and communication device WO2023010579A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180098287.4A CN117356064A (en) 2021-08-06 2021-08-06 Feedback method and device of HARQ-ACK codebook and communication equipment
PCT/CN2021/111350 WO2023010579A1 (en) 2021-08-06 2021-08-06 Feedback method and apparatus for harq-ack codebook, and communication device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/111350 WO2023010579A1 (en) 2021-08-06 2021-08-06 Feedback method and apparatus for harq-ack codebook, and communication device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023010579A1 true WO2023010579A1 (en) 2023-02-09

Family

ID=85154214

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/111350 WO2023010579A1 (en) 2021-08-06 2021-08-06 Feedback method and apparatus for harq-ack codebook, and communication device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117356064A (en)
WO (1) WO2023010579A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170331596A1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2017-11-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Feedback Information Transmission Method in Communications System and Apparatus
CN109842477A (en) * 2017-11-29 2019-06-04 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Information decoding, code book processing method and processing device, storage medium, processor
US20190215781A1 (en) * 2018-01-10 2019-07-11 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Power Control for Channel State Information
CN111147217A (en) * 2018-02-13 2020-05-12 华为技术有限公司 Method and communication device for transmitting feedback information
WO2020135852A1 (en) * 2018-12-29 2020-07-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Resource scheduling processing method and apparatus
CN111614444A (en) * 2019-05-29 2020-09-01 维沃移动通信有限公司 Hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement feedback method and terminal

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170331596A1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2017-11-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Feedback Information Transmission Method in Communications System and Apparatus
CN109842477A (en) * 2017-11-29 2019-06-04 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Information decoding, code book processing method and processing device, storage medium, processor
US20190215781A1 (en) * 2018-01-10 2019-07-11 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Power Control for Channel State Information
CN111147217A (en) * 2018-02-13 2020-05-12 华为技术有限公司 Method and communication device for transmitting feedback information
WO2020135852A1 (en) * 2018-12-29 2020-07-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Resource scheduling processing method and apparatus
CN111614444A (en) * 2019-05-29 2020-09-01 维沃移动通信有限公司 Hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement feedback method and terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117356064A (en) 2024-01-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11595991B2 (en) Method for indicating the allocated resources for a HARQ message in a random access procedure for a low-complexity, narrowband terminal
WO2020143057A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining channel access scheme, terminal device, and network device
WO2018133839A1 (en) Power allocation method and apparatus for uplink channel
WO2021159974A1 (en) Feedback method and device for hybrid automatic repeat request information
WO2021007685A1 (en) Method for transmitting sidelink data, terminal device, and network device
TWI829760B (en) Communication method and device for sidelink
WO2020191637A1 (en) Random access method, terminal device and network device
WO2022110233A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2020220359A1 (en) Method and device for determining harq codebook
WO2020143731A1 (en) Method for transmitting data, communication device and network device
WO2020248259A1 (en) Random access method, terminal device and network device
WO2020056696A1 (en) Resource allocation method and apparatus, and terminal
WO2020037626A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting feedback information, and communication device
WO2021062609A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2022021412A1 (en) Cg configuration method and apparatus, and device and medium
WO2021134619A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink control information, device, and storage medium
WO2021026841A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting a scheduling request
WO2021056209A1 (en) Method for wireless communication and device
WO2020133247A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2023010579A1 (en) Feedback method and apparatus for harq-ack codebook, and communication device
WO2022099555A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2021147076A1 (en) Harq-ack codebook feedback method and apparatus, device and storage medium
WO2021056213A1 (en) Wireless communication method and device
JP2022546903A (en) HARQ codebook determination method and device, terminal device, network device
TW202015470A (en) Wireless communication method and communication device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21952451

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE